Document the indicate-empty-lines variable.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d874e913 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-08-14
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 30
1fa28578
GM
31\f
32* Changes in Emacs 21.1
33
83b6997f
GM
34* When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
35file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
36
d7b38c05 37** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 38added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
39Postscript files are included.
40
41** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
42`dired-ref.tex'.
43
25ad1371
GM
44** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
45expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
46
47This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
48determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
49mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
50interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
51regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
52associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
53
424d8b44 54+++
f0298744
DL
55** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
56displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
57menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
58menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
59
9a8d84ca
DL
60** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
61a version-dependent component.
62
d76c03ea
GM
63** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
64Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
65will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
66character is still bound as before.
67
3b4fa1b2
DL
68** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
69using that menu.
70
40e857ea 71** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 72suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 73
beb2eb00 74+++
c08398de
DL
75** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
76buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
77contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
78by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
79insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
80the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
81Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
82
db7a3ede 83+++
3d6cd763
GM
84** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
85coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
86escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
87such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
88recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 89always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 90read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
91(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
92RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 93
0b8a3a6d
DL
94** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
95environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
96
424d8b44 97+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
98** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
99point in a pop-up window.
100
6d35b49f 101+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
102** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
103displays all characters in that character set.
104
105** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
106coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
107
a4067978 108+++
5cb6a58e 109** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
110on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
111defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 112
424d8b44 113+++
a1b8d58b
GM
114** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
115
6e417ca5
DL
116** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
117been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
118
424d8b44 119+++
5898e075
DL
120** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
121`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
122indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
123indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
124
424d8b44 125+++
abfcc168
GM
126** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
127sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 128(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
129You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
130
424d8b44 131+++
cc181e95
GM
132** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
133on the display using several methods
134
424d8b44 135+++
cc181e95
GM
136- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
137a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
138be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
139
424d8b44 140+++
cc181e95
GM
141- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
142equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
143
da4496b6 144- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
145
146- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
147the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
148
424d8b44 149+++
3b4fa1b2 150** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 151an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 152command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 153does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 154
424d8b44 155+++
176256a1 156** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
157`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
158typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 159
dd0add8e
DL
160** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
161characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
162
bf3ba9ac 163+++
699238d9
GM
164** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
165compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
166this behavior.
167
168The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
169compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
170Emacs dump core.
171
424d8b44 172+++
699238d9 173** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 174
7233c5bd
GM
175*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
176whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
177is useful for debugging X problems.
178
179Example:
180
699238d9 181 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 182
100b3cbb
GM
183*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
184visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
185the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
186and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
187visual class names are
188
189 TrueColor
190 PseudoColor
191 DirectColor
192 StaticColor
193 GrayScale
194 StaticGray
195
196Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
197`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
198meaning.
199
200The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
201supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
202`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
203visual.
204
205Example:
206
699238d9 207 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
208
209*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
210specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
211default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
212resource values are `true' or `on'.
213
214Example:
215
699238d9 216 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 217
0d0c76b8
EZ
218** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
219more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
220now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
221
42088c12 222** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 223display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
224shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
225be customized.
c60ea02e 226
424d8b44 227+++
31047e0d
DL
228** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
229
424d8b44 230+++
b02786f9
GM
231** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
232all frames except the selected one.
233
3261c1d8
DL
234** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
235to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
236
ffe36136 237** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
238the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
239MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
240displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
241
242** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
243MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 244
559cee90
DL
245** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
246read mail from the menu etc.
247
480b5773 248+++
271b4185
GM
249** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
250a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
251
0daee095
GM
252** Changes in Texinfo mode.
253
254** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
255macros
256
257 Key binding Macro
258 -------------------------
259 C-c C-c C-s @strong
260 C-c C-c C-e @emph
261 C-c C-c u @url
262 C-c C-c q @quotation
263 C-c C-c m @email
264
559cee90
DL
265** Changes in Outline mode.
266
267There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
268`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
269the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
270
7a912f63
GM
271** Changes to Emacs Server
272
c0a8c108
EZ
273+++
274*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
275with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
276are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
277Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
278buffers to kill, as before.
279
280Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 281i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
282this way.
283
956777b3
GM
284** Changes to Show Paren mode.
285
286*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
287The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
288use. Default is 1000.
289
f6989277 290+++
404fa7d6
DL
291** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
292groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
293
424d8b44
DL
294+++
295** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
296M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
297M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
298buffers.
8964fec7 299
424d8b44 300+++
39783d73
WP
301** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
302under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
303.emacs file.
304
305The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
306determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
307
d35fce81
GM
308** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
309abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
310`directory-abbrev-alist'.
311
a933dad1
DL
312** Faces and frame parameters.
313
314There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
315Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
316`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
317`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
318sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
319for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
320parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
321
322Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
323`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 324`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
325`default' face and vice versa.
326
d80061fa 327+++
f77a4a8a
GM
328** New face `menu'.
329
330The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
331Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
332attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
333
424d8b44 334+++
a933dad1
DL
335** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
336
337The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
338colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
339correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
340the screen gamma of a frame's display.
341
342PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
343in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
344color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
345
346The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
347`ScreenGamma'.
348
349** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
350
351The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
352Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
353oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
354of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
355the text.
356
357** Emacs has a new face implementation.
358
359The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
360font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
361height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
362These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
363specify a font.
364
365Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
366These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
367under Lisp changes, below.
368
369** New default font is Courier 12pt.
370
424d8b44
DL
371+++
372** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
373of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
374otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
375
376** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
377truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
378foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
379customizing face `fringe'.
380
381** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
382can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
383
384** LessTif support.
385
424d8b44
DL
386Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
387You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
388
389** Toolkit scroll bars.
390
391Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
392LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
393configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
394bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
395bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
396Emacs.
397
398When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
399Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
400Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
401Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
402define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
403`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
404
405Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
406a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
407directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
408different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
409system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
410add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
411
412The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
413`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
414This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
415image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
416Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
417
418** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
419
420When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
421widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
422Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
423
424d8b44 424+++
a933dad1
DL
425** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
426
427When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
428whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
429defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
430highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
431displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
432whitespace.
433
6e612d4d 434+++
a933dad1
DL
435** Busy-cursor.
436
437Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
438display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
439
424d8b44 440+++
a933dad1
DL
441** Blinking cursor
442
443M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
444terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
445and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
446the group `cursor'.
447
448** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
449
450This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
451generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
452See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
453details.
454
455Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
456have to do anything to activate it.
457
458** Tabs and variable-width text.
459
460Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
461defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
462independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
463Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
464
465** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
466
424d8b44 467+++
a933dad1
DL
468*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
469
470 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
471
79dd1637
RS
472The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
473LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 474
79dd1637
RS
475*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
476LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 477
34d90e29 478+++
a933dad1
DL
479** Hscrolling in C code.
480
cc181e95
GM
481Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
482`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
483customized.
a933dad1
DL
484
485** Tool bar support.
486
487Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
488how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
489
424d8b44 490+++
a933dad1
DL
491** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
492
493Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
494mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
495line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
496about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
497in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
498
499Currently, the following actions have been defined:
500
501- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
502buffers.
503
504- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
505M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
506
507- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
508
424d8b44
DL
509- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
510`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
511
512- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
513
514** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
515
516When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 517from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
518non-nil.
519
520** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
521
522Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
523Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
524the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
525italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
526Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
527attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
528on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
529
530** Sound support
531
2f516940 532Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 533driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 534supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 535
424d8b44 536+++
a933dad1
DL
537** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
538the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
539forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
540value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
541users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
542even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
543
544The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
545
0e18b431 546+++
a933dad1
DL
547** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
548
549As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
550drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
551`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
552
553** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
554bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
555
556This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
557`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
558variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
559
560** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
561
562When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
563value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
564number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
565fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
566
567When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
568value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
569number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
570fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
571
572** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
573notably at the end of lines.
574
575All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
576spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
577
424d8b44 578+++
eee54b0e
DL
579There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
580
a933dad1
DL
581** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
582query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
583after each match to get the replacement text.
584
d5483ab1
GM
585** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
586you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 587
424d8b44 588** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
589you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
590lisp-complete-symbol.
591
a933dad1
DL
592** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
593
163ea954
RS
594If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
595longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
596it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
597window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
598
599- User option: max-mini-window-height
600
601Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
602fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
603specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
604
605Default is 0.25.
606
2f72fd2f
GM
607** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
608
0d43b60d
GM
609** Changes to hideshow.el
610
611Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
612selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
613
614*** Generalized block selection and traversal
615
616A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
617(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
618which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
619`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
620point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
621(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
622
623If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
624i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
625backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
626the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
627
628*** Isearch support for updating mode line
629
630During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
631blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
632line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
633portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
634is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
635
636To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
637something like this in your .emacs.
638
639 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
640 (lambda ()
641 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
642
559cee90
DL
643** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
644
424d8b44 645+++
559cee90
DL
646If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
647entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
648log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
649
424d8b44 650+++
559cee90 651New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
424d8b44
DL
652buffer.
653
654+++
655New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries in
656a log file.
eb2aac9d
GM
657
658Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
659if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
660
424d8b44
DL
661Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
662version number is performed based on regular expressions from
663`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
664Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 665
3476b54a
GM
666** Changes in Font Lock
667
668*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
669font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
670mode.
671
b3b98592
GM
672** Comint (subshell) changes
673
66b6c480
MB
674By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
675distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
676the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
677attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
678Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
679boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
680To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
681`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
682
b3b98592
GM
683Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
684and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
685
686The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
687buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
688buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
689
690The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
691M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
692the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
693
8c1bec7c
MB
694Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
695now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
696previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
697user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 698
e26cec67
GM
699** Changes to Rmail mode
700
c0510d27
GM
701*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
702set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
703receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
704recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
705`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
706as correspondent.
707
708Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
709mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 710regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 711
3b55acc9
GM
712*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
713to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
714Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
715with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
716for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
717
6a1950ec
GM
718*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
719like `j'.
720
5bb6f079
RS
721*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
722specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 723digest message.
e26cec67 724
993d8b7d
DL
725*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
726in which folder to put messages automatically.
727
400a1ed0
GM
728** Changes to TeX mode
729
730The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
731`latex-mode'.
732
a933dad1
DL
733** Changes to RefTeX mode
734
735*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
736 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
737 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
738 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
739 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
740 can be edited from that buffer.
741
742*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
743 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
744 `A' to use all marked entries).
745
746*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
747 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
748
749*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
750 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
751 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
752 been cited.
753
38de9631
GM
754** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
755The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
756semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
757in column 1 are always made leaves.
758
a933dad1
DL
759** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
760has the following new features:
761
762*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
763may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
764to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
765time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
766
767*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
768feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
769file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
770compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
771pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
772defaults to 1.
773
5d94f558 774** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
775file names.
776
424d8b44 777+++
a933dad1
DL
778** Tooltips.
779
780Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
781mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
782can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
783
784Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
785variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
786the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
787tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
788
424d8b44 789+++
a933dad1
DL
790** Customize changes
791
792*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
793`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
794cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
795
796*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
797Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
798default).
799
0ae51efb
GM
800*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
801between custom options. Example:
802
803 (defcustom default-input-method nil
804 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
805 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
806 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
807 :group 'mule
808 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
809 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
810
811This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
812current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
813first in a custom-set-variables statement.
814
a933dad1
DL
815** New features in evaluation commands
816
5e03eb84 817*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
818modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
819print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
820customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
821eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
822
5e03eb84
GM
823*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
824code when called with a prefix argument.
825
ead53494
GM
826** Ispell changes
827
bbe15990
EZ
828*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
829transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
830spell-checks the current buffer.
831
385ff9e3
GM
832*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
833added.
834
835*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
836correction is made and re-checked.
837
74ec6045 838*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
839
840*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
841cases.
842
843*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
844on syntax errors.
845
846*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
847end of the buffer.
848
a933dad1
DL
849** Dired changes
850
851*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
852command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
853is, delete only empty directories.
854
855*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
856command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
857copy directories recursively.
858
f6737cde
GM
859*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
860in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
861the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
862
2f72fd2f
GM
863*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
864replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
865directory.
866
7381ae05
MB
867*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
868a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
869This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
870will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
871accurate or inaccurate as it is.
872
e024b101
GM
873*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
874from ls switches.
875
a933dad1
DL
876** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
877use the -f option when sending mail.
878
b1c609b1
GM
879** CC mode changes.
880
881Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
882current user setups (although it's believed that these
883incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
884However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
885back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
886compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
887release.
888
7972fcfc
GM
889*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
890This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
891of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
892non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
893want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
894have to bother.
895
896Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
897situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 898and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
899If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
900the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
901by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
902
b1c609b1
GM
903*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
904When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
905variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
906take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
907is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
908settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
909possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
910Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
911
912By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
913special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
914the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
915of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
916above.
917
918Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
919when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
920function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
921call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
922then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
923values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
924only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
925function documentation for more info.
926
927The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
928especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
929with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
930intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
931such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
932is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
933configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
934global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
935
936(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
937
938**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
939This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
940
941This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
942variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
943completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
944the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
945empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
946style system.
947
948**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
949In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
950c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
951as far as possible.
952
953*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
954CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
955surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
956chapter about this in the manual.
957
958**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
959The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
960recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
961primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
962adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
963
964**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
965This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
966c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
967
968**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
969This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
970
971It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
972Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
973A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
974inside CC Mode.
975
976Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
977causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
978the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
979available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
980cc-mode/).
981
982**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
983The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
984specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
985literals.
986
987**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
988It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
989prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
990you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
991this function.
992
993*** Fixes to IDL mode.
994It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
995to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
996struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
997Thanks to Eric Eide.
998
999*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1000It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1001opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1002
1003**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1004
1005*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1006See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1007better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1008and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1009
1010*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1011previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1012the column specified by comment-column.
1013
1014*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1015In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1016is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1017prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1018contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1019don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1020
1021*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1022instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1023arguments.
1024
1025*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1026
1027*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1028c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1029c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1030variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1031Provan).
1032
1033*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1034
c407c570
GM
1035** Makefile mode changes
1036
1037*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1038
5d94f558 1039*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1040Fontlock mode is active.
1041
87be76f6
GM
1042** Isearch changes
1043
3353ef5a
GM
1044*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1045so that searches can be resumed.
1046
1047*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1048respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1049that started the search.
1050
87be76f6 1051*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1052selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1053
87be76f6
GM
1054*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1055
d35fce81 1056Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1057`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1058search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1059before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1060highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1061`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1062
1063The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1064will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1065Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1066using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1067usual snappy response.
1068
1069If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1070matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1071set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1072isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1073
35384f06
GM
1074** Changes in sort.el
1075
1076The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1077as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
1078new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
1079numeric base.
87be76f6 1080
d7b511c4
GM
1081** Changes to Ange-ftp
1082
424d8b44 1083+++
d7b511c4 1084*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1085names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1086sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1087
d7b511c4
GM
1088*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1089ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1090
9d453139
SS
1091*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1092output ^M at the end of lines.
1093
4b9347b3
GM
1094** Shell script mode changes.
1095
1096Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1097derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1098sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1099
79214ddf
FP
1100** Etags changes.
1101
1102*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1103
aca0be23 1104*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1105possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1106{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1107This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1108a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1109
79214ddf
FP
1110*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1111declarations when given the --declarations option.
1112
1113*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1114"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1115
1116*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1117types.
1118
de370c4c 1119*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1120
1121*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1122
1123*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1124are now tagged.
1125
1126*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1127variables are tagged.
1128
1129*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1130
8dc78b52
FP
1131*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1132for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1133
f6737cde
GM
1134** Changes in etags.el
1135
3f6e4b8b
GM
1136*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1137tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1138is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1139
f6737cde
GM
1140*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1141the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1142
1143If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1144FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1145TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1146obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1147
1148TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1149
1150FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1151List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1152
1153A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1154
1155 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1156 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1157 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1158
1159*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1160of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1161
1162*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1163names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1164
424d8b44 1165+++
fbc164de
PE
1166** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1167and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1168LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1169
0b8a3a6d
DL
1170** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1171Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
11728859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1173There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 1174
424d8b44 1175+++
163ea954 1176** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1177remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1178appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1179
1180** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1181
424d8b44 1182+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1183** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1184
c0510d27
GM
1185** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1186containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1187expression from that list, are not checked.
1188
5d94f558
SS
1189** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1190When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1191and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1192the buffer, just like for the local files.
1193
dc28878c
GM
1194** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1195
a933dad1
DL
1196** New modes and packages
1197
ff332647 1198+++
90cbf47e
GM
1199*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1200intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1201typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1202on certain projects.
1203
1204*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1205regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1206
d96d6bb0 1207 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1208
1209will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1210face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1211typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1212Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1213appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1214current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1215corresponding file is read.
1216
424d8b44 1217+++
d96d6bb0 1218*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1219Emacs is idle.
1220
31fc5d15
GM
1221*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1222parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1223
5cb6a58e
SM
1224*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1225package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1226be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1227
424d8b44 1228+++
578979ee
GM
1229*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1230facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1231separate Texinfo file.
1232
424d8b44
DL
1233+++
1234*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1235by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1236provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1237`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1238enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1239
424d8b44 1240+++
6abca616
EZ
1241*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1242without invoking external programs.
1243
1244The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1245and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1246`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1247is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1248Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1249
1250The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1251page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1252
5e5dff44
GM
1253*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1254authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1255
1256The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1257the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1258the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1259Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1260even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1261single step.
1262
1263On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1264matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1265probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1266contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1267
424d8b44 1268+++
f7136ee8
GM
1269*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1270unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1271actually modifying content of a buffer.
1272
bbd9b566
GM
1273*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1274PostScript.
1275
1276Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1277
1278The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1279
1280 ; comment (until end of line)
1281 A non-terminal
1282 "C" terminal
1283 ?C? special
1284 $A default non-terminal
1285 $"C" default terminal
1286 $?C? default special
1287 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1288 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1289 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1290 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1291 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1292 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1293 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1294 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1295 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1296 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1297 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1298 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1299 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1300 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1301 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1302
1303Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1304
99453a38
GM
1305*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1306align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1307determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1308example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1309equal signs of assignments.
1310
424d8b44 1311+++
559cee90
DL
1312*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1313paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1314
424d8b44 1315+++
6448a6b3
GM
1316*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1317list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1318buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1319customize the package.
1320
6344985d
GM
1321*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1322
249652b1
GM
1323*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1324replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1325is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1326and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1327not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1328which answers different needs.
1329
424d8b44 1330+++
3476b54a
GM
1331*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1332suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1333expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1334course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1335reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1336to be enabled.
1337
424d8b44 1338+++
8964fec7
SM
1339*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1340containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1341
424d8b44 1342+++
a933dad1
DL
1343*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1344
424d8b44 1345+++
a933dad1
DL
1346*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1347
1348*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1349
1350*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1351Pascal) language.
1352
1353*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1354the text at point.
1355
1356*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1357
424d8b44 1358+++
8d54eb69
DL
1359*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1360
a933dad1
DL
1361*** whitespace.el ???
1362
ebcfda83
GM
1363*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1364files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1365(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1366interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1367often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1368uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1369codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1370
1371*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1372
1373Here is an example of columns:
1374
1375horse apple bus
1376dog pineapple car EXTRA
1377porcupine strawberry airplane
1378
1379Doing the following settings:
1380
1381 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1382 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1383 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1384 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1385
1386
1387Selecting the lines above and typing:
1388
1389 M-x delimit-columns-region
1390
1391It results:
1392
1393[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1394[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1395[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1396
1397delim-col has the following options:
1398
1399 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1400 before all columns.
1401
1402 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1403 between each column.
1404
1405 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1406 after all columns.
1407
1408 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1409 each column.
1410
1411delim-col has the following commands:
1412
1413 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1414 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1415
424d8b44 1416+++
f507826c 1417*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1418were operated on recently.
1419
1420M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1421
31fc5d15
GM
1422M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1423recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1424
31fc5d15
GM
1425M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1426filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1427file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1428
31fc5d15
GM
1429- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1430- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1431- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1432
31fc5d15
GM
1433The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1434dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1435
8062f458
DL
1436*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1437text.
1438
424d8b44 1439+++
36e24b82 1440*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1441of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1442specific to Message mode.
1443
424d8b44 1444+++
36e24b82
DL
1445*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1446viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1447with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1448
424d8b44 1449+++
aaa659ef
DL
1450*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1451interface to access directory servers using different directory
1452protocols. It has a separate manual.
1453
eee54b0e
DL
1454*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1455for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1456
424d8b44 1457+++
612839b6
GM
1458*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1459
5d94f558 1460*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1461minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1462
399da7e3
DL
1463*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1464with the diary features.
1465
6e417ca5
DL
1466*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1467numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1468
4a27bdfb
GM
1469*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1470Fill mode.
1471
a933dad1
DL
1472** Withdrawn packages
1473
1474*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1475functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1476
3261c1d8
DL
1477*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1478
1479*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1480
1481\f
1482* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1483(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1484
424d8b44
DL
1485+++
1486** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1487is running in batch mode. For example,
1488
1489 (message "%s" (read t))
1490
1491will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1492to standard output.
1493
1494+++
1495** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1496`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1497
ead53494
GM
1498** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1499will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1500frame or window.
1501
27848c01
GM
1502** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1503were added
1504
1505- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1506
1507Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1508a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1509
1510- Function: remq ELT LIST
1511
1512Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1513comparison is done with `eq'.
1514
1515** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1516
b548072f
GM
1517** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1518has been changed.
1519
424d8b44 1520+++
07b14857
KH
1521** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1522without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1523convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1524
9662da0b
GM
1525** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1526or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1527
7fce7efb
DL
1528** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1529function was declared obsolete.
1530
5d94f558 1531** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1532retained as an alias).
1533
f98d3086
SM
1534** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1535It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1536is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1537
87efd256
GM
1538** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1539
1540- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1541
1542Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1543MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1544
67c9a1d2
GM
1545** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1546
1547- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1548
1549Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1550
1551This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1552calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1553argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1554value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1555returned.
1556
1557Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1558if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1559it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1560minibuffer even if it is active.
1561
1562Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1563counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1564too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1565and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1566`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1567entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1568
1569ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1570ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1571ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1572ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1573ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1574If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1575Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1576
ead53494
GM
1577** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1578event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1579argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1580
25fa6deb
GM
1581** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1582call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1583message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1584Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1585
5d94f558 1586** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1587meaning no limit.
1588
5d94f558 1589** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1590coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1591DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1592
80c05bd3 1593** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1594of a primitive.
1595
80c05bd3
DL
1596** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1597buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1598This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1599than replacing the local map.
1600
4bc7a543
DL
1601** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1602after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1603
1604** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1605
f0298744
DL
1606** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1607promised long ago.
1608
5d94f558 1609** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1610\f
1611* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1612
1613Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1614--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1615When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1616so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1617
85c75536
MB
1618*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1619buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1620the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1621restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1622
0b8a3a6d
DL
1623*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1624`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1625when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1626multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1627
1628*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1629`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1630contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1631
1632*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1633changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1634[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1635regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1636the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1637extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1638bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1639eight-bit-graphic.
1640
1641** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1642
1643A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1644a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1645character set as previously.
1646
1647*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1648They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1649modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1650
1651CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1652characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1653range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1654case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1655
1656FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1657name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1658
1659*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1660registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1661"fontset-default".
1662
1663*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1664argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1665
1666** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1667composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1668buffers and strings.
1669
1670*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1671character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1672code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1673have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1674composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1675composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1676The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1677also been deleted.
1678
1679*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1680specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1681`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1682
1683*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1684MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1685composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1686may differ between buffer and string text.
1687
1688*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1689COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1690
1691*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1692directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1693Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1694`composition' from STRING.
1695
1696*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1697a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1698
1699*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1700obsolete.
1701
1702** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1703Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1704character set is not used.
1705
1706** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1707`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1708X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1709
1710+++
1711** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1712are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 17130xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1714
399da7e3 1715+++
f0124b4a
DL
1716** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1717that offset in the file before writing.
1718
f98d3086
SM
1719** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1720compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1721
612839b6
GM
1722** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1723`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1724from which the command was issued.
1725
1726** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1727`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1728`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1729additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1730operate on.
1731
271b4185
GM
1732** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1733to `window-buffer-height'.
1734
1735- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1736
1737Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1738The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1739lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1740
1741Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1742respectively.
1743
1744If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1745COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1746
1747The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1748obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1749on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1750
1751Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1752buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1753possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1754is currently displayed in some window.
1755
3c30cb6e
DL
1756** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1757argument function's results.
1758
62f20204
GM
1759** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1760signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1761
c0510d27
GM
1762** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1763header is the list of headers passed to it.
1764
1765** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1766ignores differences in case and text representation.
1767
1768** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1769cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1770as follows:
1771
1772 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1773 nil don't display a cursor
1774 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1775 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1776 others display a box cursor.
1777
9a0dd3dc
GM
1778** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1779an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1780defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1781set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1782
d7b511c4 1783** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1784specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1785the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1786text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1787
1788Example:
1789
1790 (string-to-syntax "()")
1791 => (4 . 41)
1792
1fa28578
GM
1793** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1794other than 10.
1795
1796*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1797INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1798
5d94f558 1799 #b1111
1fa28578 1800 => 15
5d94f558 1801 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
1802 => -15
1803
1804*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1805
5d94f558 1806 #o666
1fa28578
GM
1807 => 438
1808
1809*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1810
5d94f558 1811 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
1812 => 48815
1813
1814*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1815
5d94f558 1816 #2R-111
1fa28578 1817 => -7
5d94f558 1818 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
1819 => 267
1820
3d4ff2dd 1821** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1822the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1823and isn't a string.
1824
3d4ff2dd
GM
1825** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1826a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1827value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1828not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1829
16ce590d
DL
1830+++
1831** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1832
73825616 1833** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1834for a regexp in a string.
1835
1836** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1837`mouse-position-function'.
1838
723e779c
GM
1839** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1840that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1841
d1e103b2
GM
1842** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1843Keywords are now always considered constants.
1844
31047e0d
DL
1845+++
1846** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1847returns it.
1848
7a85e4df
GM
1849** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1850returned by function `recent-keys'.
1851
02b14400
RS
1852+++
1853** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1854can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1855Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1856etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1857mode.
404fa7d6 1858
02b14400 1859+++
8964fec7
SM
1860** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1861and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1862
02b14400
RS
1863+++
1864** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1865has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1866function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1867returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1868been performed."
1869
1870When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1871and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1872hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1873then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1874
02b14400 1875+++
81da8b32
GM
1876** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1877In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1878and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1879
02b14400 1880+++
9e207b90
GM
1881** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1882with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1883specified table.
1884
1885 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1886
1887Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1888TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1889saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1890what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1891
02b14400 1892+++
d7f89643 1893** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1894Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1895
02b14400 1896+++
dde9e75a
GM
1897** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1898removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1899
02b14400 1900+++
9da30515
GM
1901** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1902instead of being optional.
1903
02b14400 1904+++
d20679eb
GM
1905** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1906modify read-only text.
1907
02b14400 1908+++
fbc164de
PE
1909** New functions and variables for locales.
1910
1911The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1912decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1913time functions like strftime. The new variables
1914`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1915locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1916
1917The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1918environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1919the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1920environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1921not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1922`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1923`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1924
02b14400 1925+++
863476d1
SM
1926** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1927To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1928modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1929start sequences.
1930
02b14400 1931+++
ef6d912c
GM
1932** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1933because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1934
02b14400 1935+++
a933dad1
DL
1936** New function `propertize'
1937
1938The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1939strings with text properties.
1940
1941- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1942
1943Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1944by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1945PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1946specified value of that property. Example:
1947
1948 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1949
1950+++
1951** push and pop macros.
1952
02b14400
RS
1953Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1954are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1955as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1956
1957(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1958(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1959 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1960
02b14400
RS
1961** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1962
6c7fd5aa
RS
1963Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1964are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1965
1966(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1967 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1968 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1969 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1970
1971(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1972 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1973 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1974 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1975
a933dad1
DL
1976+++
1977** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1978as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1979
1980[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1981[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1982[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1983[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1984[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1985 space, and DEL.
1986[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1987 and DEL.
1988[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1989 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1990 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1991[:alpha:] matches letters.
1992 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1993 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1994[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1995[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1996[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1997[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1998 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1999 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2000[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2001[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2002[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2003
2004+++
2005** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2006
2007The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2008
2009- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2010
2011The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2012are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2013
2014:test TEST
2015
2016TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2017Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2018it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2019
2020:size SIZE
2021
2022SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2023many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2024
2025:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2026
2027REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2028full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2029size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
20301.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2031old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2032
2033:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2034
2035THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2036hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2037(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2038
2039:weakness WEAK
2040
b548072f
GM
2041WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2042`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2043`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2044collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2045outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2046
2047- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2048
2049Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2050
2051- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2052
2053Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2054
2055- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2056
2057Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2058values are shared.
2059
2060- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2061
2062Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2063
2064- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2065
2066Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2067
2068- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2069
2070Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2071
2072- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2073
2074Returns the size of TABLE.
2075
d96d6bb0 2076- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2077
2078Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2079
2080- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2081
2082Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2083
2084- Function: clrhash TABLE
2085
2086Clear TABLE.
2087
2088- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2089
2090Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2091not found.
2092
79214ddf 2093- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2094
2095Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2096another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2097
2098- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2099
2100Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2101
2102- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2103
2104Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2105arguments KEY and VALUE.
2106
2107- Function: sxhash OBJ
2108
2109Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2110
2111- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2112
2113Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2114a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2115comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2116and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2117of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2118
2119TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2120
2121HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2122code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2123integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2124
2125Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2126be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2127
2128 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2129 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2130
2131 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2132 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2133
79214ddf 2134 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2135 'case-fold-string-hash))
2136
2137 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2138
2139+++
2140** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2141
2142It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2143circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2144a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2145
2146+++
2147** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2148
2149If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2150#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2151
a933dad1
DL
2152+++
2153** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2154t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2155specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2156is too short to reach that column.
2157
2158+++
2159** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2160now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2161after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2162two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2163
2164If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2165perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2166and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2167
2168+++
2169** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2170to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2171
2172+++
2173** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2174calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2175
2176+++
2177** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2178directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2179small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2180small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2181temporary-file-directory instead.
2182
2183+++
2184** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2185the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2186`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2187hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2188
2189+++
2190** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2191elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2192
2193+++
2194** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2195
2196make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2197creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2198ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2199
2200+++
2201** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2202
2203The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2204on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2205is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2206never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2207ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2208overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2209
2210If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2211that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2212to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2213The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2214
2215+++
2216** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2217
2218Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2219If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2220ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2221result string.
2222
2223Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2224string where arguments appear in the result string.
2225
2226Example:
2227
2228 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2229 (s2 "world"))
2230 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2231 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2232 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2233
2234results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2235
2236+++
2237** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2238
2239Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2240The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2241argument in it.
2242
2243 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2244 (arg "world"))
2245 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2246 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2247 (message msg arg))
2248
2249+++
2250** Sound support
2251
2252Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2253(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2254
2255Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2256(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2257to enable sound support.
2258
2259Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2260list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2261when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2262functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2263sound to play, before playing the sound.
2264
2265The following sound properties are supported:
2266
2267- `:file FILE'
2268
2269FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2270searched relative to `data-directory'.
2271
6fb40beb
GM
2272- `:data DATA'
2273
2274DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2275may be present, but not both.
2276
a933dad1
DL
2277- `:volume VOLUME'
2278
2279VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
22800..1. This property is optional.
2281
2282Other properties are ignored.
2283
2284** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2285
2286** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2287a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2288
2289** Changes to garbage collection
2290
2291*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2292of live and free strings.
2293
2294*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2295strings that have been consed so far.
2296
a933dad1 2297\f
04545643
GM
2298* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2299Lisp Manual
2300
9a8d84ca
DL
2301+++
2302** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2303
2304** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2305image.
2306
2307- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2308
2309Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2310
2311SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2312measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2313character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2314font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2315FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2316
0b8a3a6d
DL
2317** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2318satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2319
2320+++
2321** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2322optional.
2323
04545643
GM
2324** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2325
2326When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2327around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2328at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2329properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2330
2331\f
a933dad1
DL
2332* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2333
2334Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2335--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2336When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2337so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2338
f6d3257b
GM
2339** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2340to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2341
2342Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2343text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2344is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2345your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2346laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2347just display it black instead.
2348
2349This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2350a line like
2351
2352 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2353
2354in your `.emacs'.
2355
a933dad1
DL
2356** New face implementation.
2357
2358Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2359font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2360
2361+++
2362*** New faces.
2363
2364Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2365
2366 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2367
a933dad1
DL
2368 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2369 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2370
a933dad1 2371 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2372
a933dad1 2373 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2374
a933dad1 2375 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2376
a933dad1 2377 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2378
a933dad1
DL
2379 7. Background color.
2380
2381 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2382
2383 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2384
2385 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2386
2387 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2388
2389 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2390 color.
2391
2392 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2393 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2394
2395Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2396same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2397frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2398faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2399with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2400attributes mentioned above.
2401
2402There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2403definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2404created frames.
79214ddf 2405
a933dad1
DL
2406A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2407have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2408`fully-specified'.
2409
2410+++
2411*** Face merging.
2412
2413The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2414combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2415aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2416properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2417that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2418results in a fully-specified face.
2419
2420+++
2421*** Face realization.
2422
2423After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2424merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2425realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2426available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2427face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2428cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2429
2430Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2431character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2432for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2433charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2434
2435Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2436specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2437being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2438the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2439statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2440
2441In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2442`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
24430x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2444the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2445initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2446Emacs.
2447
2448Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2449`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2450registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2451with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2452
2453++++
2454**** Clearing face caches.
2455
2456The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2457on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2458unused fonts.
2459
2460+++
2461*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2462
a933dad1
DL
2463Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2464given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2465for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2466
2467If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2468pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2469family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2470property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2471an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2472
2473Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2474against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2475match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2476
2477Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2478
2479The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2480attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2481face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2482names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2483that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2484width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2485to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2486
2487Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2488specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2489face doesn't exist.
2490
2491+++
2492**** Scalable fonts
2493
2494Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2495since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2496servers.
2497
2498To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2499`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2500scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2501Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2502scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2503that list. Example:
2504
2505 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2506
2507allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2508
2509+++
2510*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2511
2512- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2513
2514Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2515is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2516string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2517
2518If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2519the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2520FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2521POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2522SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2523These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2524if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2525REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2526the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2527of the face font sort order.
2528
79214ddf 2529- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2530
2531Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2532omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2533(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2534non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2535
2536- Variable: font-list-limit
2537
2538Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2539won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2540matching font. The default is currently 100.
2541
2542+++
2543*** Setting face attributes.
2544
2545For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2546with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2547implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2548`face-attribute'.
2549
2550Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2551symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2552
2553The following attributes are recognized:
2554
2555`:family'
2556
2557VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2558or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2559and `?' are allowed.
2560
2561`:width'
2562
2563VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2564It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2565`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2566`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2567
2568`:height'
2569
2570VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
25711/10 pt.
2572
2573`:weight'
2574
2575VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2576symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2577`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2578
2579`:slant'
2580
2581VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2582symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2583`reverse-oblique'.
2584
2585`:foreground', `:background'
2586
2587VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2588
2589`:underline'
2590
2591VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2592VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2593a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2594don't underline.
2595
2596`:overline'
2597
2598VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2599VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2600string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2601overline.
2602
2603`:strike-through'
2604
2605VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2606striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2607face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2608is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2609
2610`:box'
2611
2612VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2613around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2614VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2615of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2616and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2617VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2618:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2619the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2620specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2621defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2622the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2623color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2624should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2625like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2626that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2627the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2628box.
2629
2630`:inverse-video'
2631
2632VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2633inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2634
2635`:stipple'
2636
2637If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2638The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2639searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2640HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2641is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2642explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2643
2644For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2645and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2646
2647`:font'
2648
2649Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2650XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2651is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2652versions of Emacs.
2653
2654For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2655be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2656must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2657
2658Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2659`defface'.
2660
2661*** Face attributes and X resources
2662
2663The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2664from X resources:
2665
2666 Face attribute X resource class
2667-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2668 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2669 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2670 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2671 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2672 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2673 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2674 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2675 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2676 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2677 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2678 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2679 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2680 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2681 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2682 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2683 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2684 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2685 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2686 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2687
2688+++
2689*** Text property `face'.
2690
2691The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2692specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2693specification can be
2694
26951. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2696
26972. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2698 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2699 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2700 for face attribute names.
2701
27023. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2703 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2704 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2705
2706+++
2707** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2708
acf3ecb7
EZ
2709The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2710on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2711the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2712default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2713`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2714used to clear the mapping table.
2715
acf3ecb7
EZ
2716** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2717
2718The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2719and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2720type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2721color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2722display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2723old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2724`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2725compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2726should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2727modify their color-related behavior.
2728
2729The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2730any frame type.
2731
8a5719f0
EZ
2732** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2733
2734The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2735`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2736`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2737`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2738`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2739`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2740display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2741the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2742platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2743
a933dad1
DL
2744+++
2745** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2746
463cac2d 2747This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2748
2749The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2750end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2751Otherwise, it returns zero.
2752
463cac2d
GM
2753** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2754
2755There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2756buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 2757property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 2758
9a9dfda8 2759Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2760forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2761to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2762not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2763commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2764boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2765`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2766functions.
463cac2d
GM
2767
2768Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2769a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2770editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2771
9a9dfda8
GM
2772The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2773
59927f88 2774- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
2775
2776Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 2777
9a9dfda8
GM
2778A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2779If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2780constrained position if that is is different.
2781
2782If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2783positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2784ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 2785constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
2786as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2787is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
2788fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
2789the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
2790also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
2791
2792If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2793NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2794unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2795C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2796only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2797
59927f88
MB
2798If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
2799a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
2800
2801Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
2802
2803- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 2804
59927f88 2805Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 2806A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2807If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2808
2809- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2810
2811Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2812A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2813If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2814If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
2815field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2816
2817- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2818
2819Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2820A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2821If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2822If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
2823then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2824
2825- Function: field-string &optional POS
2826
2827Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2828A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2829If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2830
2831- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2832
2833Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2834A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2835If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 2836
a933dad1
DL
2837+++
2838** Image support.
2839
2840Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2841strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2842(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2843replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2844
2845If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2846`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2847AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2848window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2849area.
2850
2851IMAGE is an image specification.
2852
2853*** Image specifications
2854
2855Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2856is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2857specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2858symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2859described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2860
2861The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2862
2863`:ascent ASCENT'
2864
576da55d
GM
2865ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2866If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 2867to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
2868
2869If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2870image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2871
5d94f558 2872If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
2873centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2874of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2875overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2876
2877`:margin MARGIN'
2878
79214ddf 2879MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2880margin around the image. Default is 0.
2881
2882`:relief RELIEF'
2883
2884RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2885around an image.
2886
2887`:algorithm ALGO'
2888
2889Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2890be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2891supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2892which is intended to display images "disabled."
2893
2894`:heuristic-mask BG'
2895
2896If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2897background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2898determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2899corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2900the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2901be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2902background of the image.
2903
2904`:file FILE'
2905
2906Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2907search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2908building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2909may be present in the image specification.
2910
518df5c4
GM
2911`:data DATA'
2912
2913Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2914supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2915present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2916support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2917
a933dad1
DL
2918*** Supported image types
2919
b246b1f6 2920**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2921
2922XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2923properties supported are
2924
2925`:foreground FG'
2926
2927FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2928is the frame's foreground.
2929
2930`:background FG'
2931
2932BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2933the frame's background color.
2934
2935XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2936case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2937instead of a `:file' property.
2938
2939`:width WIDTH'
2940
2941WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2942
2943`:height HEIGHT'
2944
2945HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2946
2947`:data DATA'
2948
2949DATA must be either
2950
2951 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2952 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2953
2954 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2955
2956 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2957 bitmap.
2958
c76e04a8
GM
2959 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2960 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2961 in the file.
2962
a933dad1
DL
2963**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2964
2965XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2966`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2967found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2968`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2969
2970Additional image properties supported are:
2971
2972`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2973
2974SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2975name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2976name.
2977
2978XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2979add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2980
a933dad1
DL
2981The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2982to display compressed images.
2983
2984**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2985
2986PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2987mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2988defined.
2989
2990**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2991
2992Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2993package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2994are:
2995
a933dad1
DL
2996**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2997
2998Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2999package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3000properties defined.
3001
3002**** GIF, image type `gif'
3003
3004Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3005`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3006
3007Additional image properties supported are:
3008
3009`:index INDEX'
3010
3011INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3012multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3013
3014This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3015For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3016at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3017every 0.1 seconds.
3018
3019(defun show-anim (file max)
3020 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3021 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3022
3023(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3024 (when (= idx max)
3025 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3026 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3027 (save-excursion
3028 (set-buffer buffer)
3029 (goto-char (point-min))
3030 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3031 (insert-image img "x"))
3032 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3033
3034**** PNG, image type `png'
3035
3036Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3037package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3038properties defined.
3039
3040**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3041
3042Additional image properties supported are:
3043
3044`:pt-width WIDTH'
3045
3046WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3047integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3048
3049`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3050
3051HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3052must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3053
3054`:bounding-box BOX'
3055
3056BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3057the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3058files. This is an required property.
3059
3060Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3061lisp/gs.el.
3062
3063*** Lisp interface.
3064
79214ddf
FP
3065The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3066which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3067
3068Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3069they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3070The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3071manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3072images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3073
3074*** Simplified image API, image.el
3075
3076The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3077creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3078can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3079define an image based on available image types. The functions
3080`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3081buffer.
3082
3083+++
3084** Display margins.
3085
3086Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3087and images.
3088
3089To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3090`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3091`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3092obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3093`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3094the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3095of the display margins.
3096
3097You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3098containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3099one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3100string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3101in this file).
3102
3103+++
3104** Help display
3105
3106Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3107moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3108`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3109that have a `help-echo' property.
3110
9662da0b 3111If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3112is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3113the window in which the help was found.
3114
3115If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3116`help-echo' text property was found.
3117
3118If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3119POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3120
3121If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3122the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3123mouse.
d5aa31d8 3124
9662da0b
GM
3125If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3126string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3127
3128For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3129determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3130property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3131For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3132used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3133
3134The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3135the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3136causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3137
3138+++
3139** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3140
3141The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3142This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3143
3144The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3145scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3146The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3147scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3148used.
3149
79214ddf
FP
3150 (global-set-key [A-down]
3151 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3152 (interactive)
79214ddf 3153 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3154 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3155 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3156 #'(lambda ()
3157 (interactive)
79214ddf 3158 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3159 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3160
3161+++
3162** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3163
3164Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3165when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3166variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3167is called with one argument, POS.
3168
3169At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3170characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3171as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3172property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3173`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3174
3175+++
3176** Tool bar support.
3177
3178Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3179parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3180controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3181suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3182`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3183automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3184
3185*** Tool bar item definitions
3186
3187Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3188`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3189where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3190
a933dad1
DL
3191CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3192evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3193the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3194property (see below).
79214ddf 3195
a933dad1
DL
3196BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3197binding are currently ignored.
3198
3199The following properties are recognized:
3200
3201`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3202
a933dad1
DL
3203FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3204or disabled.
79214ddf 3205
a933dad1 3206`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3207
a933dad1 3208FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3209
a933dad1
DL
3210`:filter FUNCTION'
3211
3212FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3213FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3214used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3215
a933dad1
DL
3216`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3217
3218TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3219and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3220
a933dad1
DL
3221`:image IMAGES'
3222
3223IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3224image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3225meaning of each of the four elements:
3226
3227 Index Use when item is
3228 ----------------------------------------
3229 0 enabled and selected
3230 1 enabled and deselected
3231 2 disabled and selected
3232 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3233
4ba7246d
GM
3234If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3235algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3236
a933dad1 3237`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3238
a933dad1
DL
3239Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3240is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3241
3242*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3243
3244If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3245resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3246than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3247
79214ddf 3248If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3249raised when the mouse moves over them.
3250
3251You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3252`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3253pixels. Default is 1.
3254
3255You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3256`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3257
3258*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3259
3260You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3261a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3262
3263 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3264 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3265 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3266
3267is the original tool bar item definition, then
3268
3269 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3270
3271makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3272item.
3273
3274** Mode line changes.
3275
3276+++
3277*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3278
3279The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3280that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3281a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3282
32831. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3284a `local-map' text property.
3285
32862. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3287that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3288
32893. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3290is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3291`local-map' property.
3292
3293The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3294properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3295example.
3296
54522c9f
GM
3297*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3298evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3299
a933dad1
DL
3300+++
3301*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3302variable mode-line-format to nil.
3303
3304+++
3305*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3306
3307This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3308`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3309completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3310`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3311line.
3312
3313The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3314`header-line'.
3315
3316The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3317position in the header-line.
3318
3319+++
3320** Text property `display'
3321
3322The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3323also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3324`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3325below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3326
3327*** Variable width and height spaces
3328
3329To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3330specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3331`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3332area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3333marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3334displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3335simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3336
3337The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3338PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3339properties described below.
3340
3341The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3342characters having the `display' property.
3343
3344- :width WIDTH
3345
3346Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3347character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3348
3349- :relative-width FACTOR
3350
3351Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3352first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3353same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3354width of that character by FACTOR.
3355
3356- :align-to HPOS
3357
3358Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3359value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3360
3361Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3362
3363- :height HEIGHT
3364
3365Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3366normal line height.
3367
3368- :relative-height FACTOR
3369
3370The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3371of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3372
3373- :ascent ASCENT
3374
3375Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3376used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3377baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3378equal to 100.
3379
3380You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3381
3382*** Images
3383
3384A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3385. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3386in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3387their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3388the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3389`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3390area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3391the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3392as display specification.
3393
3394*** Other display properties
3395
3396- :space-width FACTOR
3397
3398Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3399should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3400integer or float.
3401
3402- :height HEIGHT
3403
3404Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3405
3406If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3407means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3408the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3409``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3410a font is available counts as a step.
3411
3412If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3413as tall as the frame's default font.
3414
3415If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3416height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3417
3418Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3419`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3420
3421- :raise FACTOR
3422
3423FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3424font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3425raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3426amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3427`:height' subproperty.
3428
3429*** Conditional display properties
3430
3431All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3432has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3433applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3434During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3435the text having the `display' property.
3436
3437The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3438`(:when t SPEC)'.
3439
3440+++
3441** New menu separator types.
3442
3443Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3444item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3445treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3446to specify other menu separator types.
3447
3448- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3449
3450No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3451separator occurs.
3452
3453- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3454
3455A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3456
3457- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3458
3459A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3460
3461- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3462
3463A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3464
3465- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3466
3467A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3468
3469- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3470
3471A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3472displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3473
3474- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3475
3476A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3477
3478- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3479
3480A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3481
3482- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3483
3484A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3485
3486- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3487
3488Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3489
3490- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3491
3492Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3493
3494- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3495
3496Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3497
3498- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3499
3500Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3501
3502Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3503the corresponding single-line separators.
3504
3505+++
3506** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3507
3508The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3509`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3510Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3511that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3512default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3513default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3514default foreground is black.
3515
3516The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3517(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3518`ScrollBarBackground').
3519
3520Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3521settings for scroll bar colors.
3522
3523+++
3524** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3525display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3526
3527---
3528** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3529starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3530on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3531line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3532the original window start.
3533
3534---
3535** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3536`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3537now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3538
3539+++
3540** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3541
3542A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3543`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3544windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3545other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3546
3547The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3548fixed-width and fixed-height.
3549
3550 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3551
3552A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3553fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3554window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3555change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3556temporarily to nil, for example
3557
3558 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3559 (enlarge-window 10))
3560
79214ddf 3561Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3562or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3563
3564** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3565terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3566to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3567overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3568horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3569support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3570
3787e12e
GM
3571
3572^L
3573* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3574
3575** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3576input.
3577
3578** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3579
3580** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3581
3582** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3583only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3584exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3585(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3586(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3587
3588** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3589been added.
3590
3591^L
3592* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3593
3594** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3595
3596^L
3597* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3598
3599** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3600M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3601\f
3602* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3603
3604** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3605
3606You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3607Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3608`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3609
3610If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3611is the one that is used.
3612
3613** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3614the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3615Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3616separate from the command's regular output.
3617Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3618says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3619In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3620the buffer name.
3621
3622When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3623output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3624it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3625cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3626
3627** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3628the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3629is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3630created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3631
3632** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3633example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3634match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3635quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3636
3637** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3638now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3639if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3640they never ignore case.
3641
3642** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3643under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3644applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3645of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3646just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3647convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3648part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3649
3650If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3651the same format that was used in the file before.
3652
3653You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3654`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3655
3656** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3657renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3658This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3659
3660** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3661The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3662buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3663your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3664is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3665end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3666Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3667
3668The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3669eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3670control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3671format. You can now customize these variables.
3672
3673** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3674filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3675filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3676enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3677
3678** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3679in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3680windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3681
3682** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3683dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3684doesn't have any effect.
3685
3686** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3687not one per buffer.
3688
3689** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3690use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3691 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3692
3693** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3694To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3695`auto-show-mode' command.
3696
3697** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3698avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3699versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3700choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3701occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3702
3703** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3704cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3705
3706** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3707character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3708feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3709
3710** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3711the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3712interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3713and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3714
3715** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3716
3717The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3718that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3719one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3720codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3721set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3722
3723Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3724from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3725
3726IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3727equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3728a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3729`?' on other systems.
3730
3731IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3732feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3733Unix.
3734
3735Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3736current codepage when it starts.
3737
3738** Mail changes
3739
3740*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3741`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3742appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3743non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3744MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3745headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3746latin-1:
3747
3748 MIME-version: 1.0
3749 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3750 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3751
3752*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3753default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3754default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3755sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3756buffer-file-coding-system.
3757
3758You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3759sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3760mail.
3761
3762*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3763if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3764Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3765list of possible coding systems.
3766
3767** CC Mode changes
3768
3769*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3770modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3771longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3772docstring for details.
3773
3774*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3775symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3776found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3777prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3778lineup functions use this feature currently.
3779
3780*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3781"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3782
3783*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3784"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3785
3786*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3787from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3788symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3789c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3790anonymous classes.
3791
3792*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3793syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3794
3795*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3796inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3797support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3798function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3799
3800*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3801(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3802brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3803c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3804(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3805
3806*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3807
3808*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3809
3810*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3811for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3812
3813*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3814
3815*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3816associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3817This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3818circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3819class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3820
3821** Gnus changes.
3822
3823*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3824added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3825Gnus manual for the full story.
3826
3827*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3828before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3829group, which is created automatically.
3830
3831*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3832values.
3833
3834*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3835
3836*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3837outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3838
3839*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3840`C-u C-c C-c'.
3841
3842*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3843
3844*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3845re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3846
3847*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3848
3849*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3850Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3851
3852*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3853`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3854
3855*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3856control over simplification.
3857
3858*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3859
3860*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3861limit.
3862
3863*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3864
3865*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3866
3867*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
3868If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3869rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3870
3871*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3872`a' forces normal posting method.
3873
3874*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3875-- `W d'.
3876
3877*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3878to a non-nil value.
3879
3880*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3881where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3882
3883*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3884has been added.
3885
3886*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3887
3888*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3889
3890*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3891`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3892
3893*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3894`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3895
3896*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3897
3898*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3899been added.
3900
3901*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3902`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3903
3904*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3905updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3906
3907*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3908
3909*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3910
3911*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3912
3913** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3914
3915*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3916options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3917nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3918
3919*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3920TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3921of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3922TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3923can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3924
3925*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3926All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3927but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3928the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3929
3930*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3931the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3932buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3933mismatch.
3934
3935** Changes to RefTeX mode
3936
3937*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3938file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3939
3940*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3941lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3942characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3943removed from the label.
3944
3945*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3946a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3947
3948*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3949customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3950
3951*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3952`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
3953expressions.
3954
3955*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3956
3957** New/deleted modes and packages
3958
3959*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3960SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3961
3962*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3963editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3964SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3965
3966*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3967changes with a special face.
3968
3969*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3970this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3971Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3972\f
3973* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3974
3975** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3976This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3977conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3978and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3979check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3980
3981The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3982Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3983distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3984
3985** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3986MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3987controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3988directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3989Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3990on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3991string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3992program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3993printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3994
3995** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3996output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3997available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3998input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3999temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4000program.
4001
4002An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4003and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4004programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4005automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4006as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4007ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4008
4009** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4010a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4011MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4012was not documented clearly before.
4013
4014** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4015This includes Tetris and Snake.
4016\f
4017* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4018
4019** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4020return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4021They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4022meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4023
4024** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4025WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4026and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4027
4028** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4029
4030*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4031It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4032
4033*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4034the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4035integers.
4036
4037** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4038files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4039arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4040file names and attributes are returned.
4041
4042** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4043sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4044accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4045It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4046returns the result.
4047
4048** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4049to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4050
4051** New functions for base64 conversion:
4052
4053The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4054into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4055performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4056optionally.
4057
4058Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4059job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4060
4061**
4062The new function process-running-child-p
4063will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4064terminal to its own child process.
4065
4066** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4067when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4068to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4069itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4070
4071** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4072be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4073
4074** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4075:included is an alias for :visible.
4076
4077easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4078easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4079to move or copy menu entries.
4080
4081** Multibyte editing changes
4082
4083*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4084an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4085make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4086work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4087char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4088 (setq char (sref str idx)
4089 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4090The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4091
4092If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4093(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4094 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4095
4096*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4097region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4098deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4099
4100 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4101
4102This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4103across the boundary.
4104
4105*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4106`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4107 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4108 contains 8-bit characters.
4109 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4110 contains invalid characters.
4111
4112*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4113text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4114preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4115text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4116way.
4117
4118*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4119If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4120end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4121prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4122
4123*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4124compose Thai characters in a string.
4125
4126** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4127argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4128for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4129menus should always use the third argument.
4130
4131** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4132read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4133arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4134input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4135
4136** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4137of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4138programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4139inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4140
4141** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4142the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4143returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4144echo area contents.
4145
4146 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4147
4148** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4149NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4150requested feature cannot be loaded.
4151
4152** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4153foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4154means to clear out that attribute.
4155
4156** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4157gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4158
4159** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4160read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4161unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4162end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4163
4164** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4165the gap of the current buffer.
4166
4167** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4168to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4169current buffer.
4170
4171** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4172facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4173These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4174it back in after any modifications have been made.
4175\f
4176* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4177
4178** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4179the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4180/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4181directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4182subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4183
4184Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4185names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4186Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4187which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4188these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4189
4190Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4191starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4192time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4193
4194This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4195Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4196to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4197subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4198`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4199results.
4200
4201** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4202GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4203that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4204fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4205\f
4206* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4207
4208** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4209including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4210it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4211perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4212
4213** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4214specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4215region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4216further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4217command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4218within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4219are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4220region.
4221
4222In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4223selective undo.
4224
4225** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4226unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4227buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4228effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4229Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4230
4231The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4232though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4233-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4234load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4235
4236** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4237no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4238enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4239something that most users not do.
4240
4241** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4242operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4243The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4244applications.
4245
4246C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4247pasting operations.
4248
4249** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4250setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4251like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4252printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4253`ps-printer-name'.
4254
4255** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4256minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4257any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4258except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4259incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4260hits a new word.
4261
4262Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4263Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4264to be confused by TeX commands.
4265
4266You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4267correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4268clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4269of various alternative replacements and actions.
4270
4271Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4272the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4273corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4274alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4275flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4276
4277Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4278flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4279
4280** Changes in input method usage.
4281
4282Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4283the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4284respectively.
4285
4286You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4287
4288If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4289of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4290
4291The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4292that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4293
4294 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4295
4296 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4297
4298 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4299 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4300
4301 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4302 given in the following case:
4303 o When you are using a complex input method.
4304 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4305
4306If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4307input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4308and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4309setting it to t is helpful.
4310
4311The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4312
4313In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4314keys:
4315 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4316 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4317 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4318These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4319environment.
4320
4321** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4322names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4323minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4324get
4325
4326 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4327
4328which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4329
4330Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4331Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4332
4333** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4334at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4335its owner and group.
4336
4337** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4338Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4339
4340** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4341contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4342
4343** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4344which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4345in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4346by the left edge of the rectangle.
4347
4348** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4349increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4350C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4351for writing keyboard macros.
4352
4353** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4354files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4355frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4356the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4357additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4358info.
4359
4360** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4361
4362** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4363query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4364contents only.
4365
4366** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4367confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4368the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4369says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4370
4371** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4372non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4373literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4374
4375** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4376now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4377Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4378inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4379
4380** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4381failure if the command produces no output.
4382
4383** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4384manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4385the mouse.
4386
4387** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4388mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4389function and variable names.
4390
4391** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4392reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4393file-coding-system-alist.
4394
4395** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4396t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4397converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4398the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4399according to the current fontset.
4400
4401** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4402
4403The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4404that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4405nonascii-insert-offset.
4406
4407For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4408enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4409nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4410characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4411
4412** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4413an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4414
4415** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4416letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4417
4418** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4419are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4420command keys.
4421
4422** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4423user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4424
4425Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4426user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4427all variables that have documentation.
4428
4429** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4430shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4431that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4432minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4433it should show; the default is 20.
4434
4435Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4436the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4437of your input.
4438
4439** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4440all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4441recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4442argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4443the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4444Newly added options are included as well.
4445
4446If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4447then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4448for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4449
4450This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4451Customize menu.
4452
4453** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4454the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4455
4456** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4457buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4458invoked.
4459
4460** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4461that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4462The default is 1.
4463
4464** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4465syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4466new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4467(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4468sensibly.
4469
4470** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4471
4472** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4473value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4474two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4475
4476** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4477reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4478for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4479every night.
4480
4481** Desktop changes
4482
4483*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4484the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4485
4486*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4487and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4488
4489** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4490read and post multi-lingual articles.
4491
4492** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4493doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4494be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4495outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4496the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4497made invisible again.
4498
4499** Mail reading and sending changes
4500
4501*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4502the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4503changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4504toggle.
4505
4506*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4507now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4508summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4509the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4510rmail-default-body-file.
4511
4512*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4513longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4514handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4515
4516*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4517it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4518is evaluated to insert the signature.
4519
4520*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4521outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4522handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4523putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4524transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4525especially interested in trying feedmail.
4526
4527feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4528feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4529provided by feedmail are:
4530
4531**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4532stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4533there is also a queue for draft messages
4534
4535**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4536be prompted for confirmation
4537
4538**** does smart filling of address headers
4539
4540**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4541the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4542can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4543
4544**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4545the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4546/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4547function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4548
4549** Dired changes
4550
4551*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4552files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4553
4554*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4555run Dired on the directory name at point.
4556
4557*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4558files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4559for a specified regexp.
4560
4561** VC Changes
4562
4563*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4564conveniently.
4565
4566*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4567faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4568Dired.
4569
4570VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4571directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4572listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4573currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4574
4575You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4576then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4577vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4578control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4579on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4580
4581All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4582is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4583`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4584the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4585`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4586
4587The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4588toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4589VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4590`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4591
4592Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4593ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4594command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4595
4596*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4597file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4598session to resolve them.
4599
4600Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4601resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4602contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4603uses as well).
4604
4605*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4606command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4607you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4608either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4609branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4610If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4611using ediff.
4612
4613** Changes in Font Lock
4614
4615*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4616are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4617use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4618unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4619compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4620
4621** Frame name display changes
4622
4623*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4624frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4625raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4626when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4627
4628*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4629frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4630menu.
4631
4632** Comint (subshell) changes
4633
4634*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4635subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4636with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4637
4638*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4639
4640C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4641that is, the line after the last line you got.
4642You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4643
4644C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4645send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4646the following line.
4647
4648C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4649which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4650previously sent input.
4651
4652C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4653it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4654as the search string.
4655
4656*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4657automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4658
4659** C mode changes
4660
4661*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4662and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4663assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4664definition.
4665
4666*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4667(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4668Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4669style is still the default however.
4670
4671*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4672
4673*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4674are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4675them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4676
4677*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4678and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4679
4680*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4681namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4682
4683*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4684makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4685
4686*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4687c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4688
4689*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4690should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4691package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4692variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4693
4694** Changes to hippie-expand.
4695
4696*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4697non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4698which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4699
4700*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4701non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4702expanding dynamically.
4703
4704*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4705non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4706
4707*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4708non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4709this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4710expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4711
4712*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4713
4714** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4715
4716*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4717bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4718automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4719bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4720against the first word in the title.
4721
4722*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4723capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4724bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4725lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4726lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4727bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4728
4729*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4730generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4731replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4732bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4733
4734** Changes in vcursor.el.
4735
4736*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4737and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4738variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4739entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4740`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4741in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4742
4743*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4744Editing group once the package is loaded.
4745
4746*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4747generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4748vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4749
4750*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4751vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4752
4753** Ispell changes.
4754
4755*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4756buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
4757are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4758
4759*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4760A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4761and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4762defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
4763include:
4764
4765 o URLs are automatically skipped
4766 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4767
4768*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4769
4770** Changes to RefTeX mode
4771
4772RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4773large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4774re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4775section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4776
4777*** New recursive parser.
4778
4779The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4780entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4781recursive parser scans the individual files.
4782
4783*** Parsing only part of a document.
4784
4785Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4786partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4787the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4788
4789 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4790
4791*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4792
4793This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4794
4795 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4796
4797*** Using multiple selection buffers
4798
4799If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4800for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4801
4802 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4803
4804*** References to external documents.
4805
4806The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4807documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4808documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4809macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4810RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4811the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4812The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4813
4814*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4815
4816The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4817and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4818
4819Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4820the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4821
4822*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4823
4824The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4825buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4826
4827*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4828
4829The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4830contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4831`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4832have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4833enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4834at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4835more.
4836
4837*** Support for the varioref package
4838
4839The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4840
4841*** New hooks
4842
4843Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4844and citations are created. These hooks are
4845`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4846`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4847
4848*** Citations outside LaTeX
4849
4850The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4851a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4852
4853*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4854
4855The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4856fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4857fontified, use
4858
4859 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4860
4861** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4862With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4863the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4864directories that contain the same file name.
4865
4866Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4867Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4868file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4869Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4870have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4871names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4872directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4873directory.
4874
4875** New modes and packages
4876
4877*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4878It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4879it, but some do not.
4880
4881*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4882code.
4883
4884*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4885current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4886around in a buffer.
4887
4888Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4889
4890*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4891uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4892be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4893established system of notation similar to Chess.
4894
4895*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4896documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4897guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4898
4899*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4900available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4901system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4902simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4903functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4904the like.
4905
4906*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4907identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4908
4909*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4910within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4911used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4912the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4913
4914*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4915
4916 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4917 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4918 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4919 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4920 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4921 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4922 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4923 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4924 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4925 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4926 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4927
4928 Platform-specific modes:
4929
4930 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4931 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4932 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4933 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4934 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4935 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4936 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4937 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4938 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4939\f
4940* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4941
4942** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4943use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4944That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4945Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4946
4947Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4948you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4949consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4950
4951** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4952and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4953specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4954searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4955
4956** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4957multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4958character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4959environment.
4960
4961** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4962take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4963string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4964current input method for reading this one event.
4965
4966** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4967now control whether to output certain characters as
4968backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4969non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4970characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4971in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4972\f
4973* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4974
4975** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4976of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4977
4978** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4979in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4980always increases point by 1.
4981
4982The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4983considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4984
4985See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4986
4987** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4988Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4989default value changed. For example,
4990
4991 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4992 :type 'integer
4993 :group 'foo
4994 :version "20.3")
4995
4996 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
4997 :version "20.3")
4998
4999If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5000default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5001is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5002`:version' in the top level group.
5003
5004This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5005
5006** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5007starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5008
5009However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5010symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5011support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5012to themselves.
5013
5014If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5015this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5016values whatever.
5017
5018** There is a new debugger command, R.
5019It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5020in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5021
5022** Frame-local variables.
5023
5024You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5025the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5026local bindings for that variable.
5027
5028These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5029frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5030modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5031parameter name.
5032
5033Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5034Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5035active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5036that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5037
5038It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5039clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5040very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5041through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5042
5043** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5044"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5045evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5046makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5047See the documentation in sregex.el.
5048
5049** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5050is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5051parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5052The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5053
5054** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5055If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5056
5057** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5058known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5059define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5060
5061** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5062when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5063it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5064history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5065
5066The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5067return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5068empty input.
5069
5070** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5071for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5072`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5073Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5074`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5075
5076** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5077echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5078a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5079default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5080
5081** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5082specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5083function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5084place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5085non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5086
5087** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5088If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5089up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5090end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5091
5092** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5093which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5094If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5095
5096** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5097holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5098was directed to display this buffer.
5099
5100** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5101with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5102describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5103other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5104set-window-configuration.
5105
5106** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5107window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5108positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5109windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5110
5111** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5112override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5113look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5114
5115If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5116non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5117map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5118
5119minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5120and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5121
5122** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5123except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5124
5125** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5126USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5127floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5128
5129** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5130to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5131in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5132it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5133
5134** Menu changes
5135
5136*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5137keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5138better supported.
5139
5140The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5141a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5142you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5143can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5144then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5145
5146*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5147
5148In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5149 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5150defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5151starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5152
5153The format is:
5154 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5155 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5156where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5157string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5158The supported properties include
5159
5160:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5161 item is enabled.
5162:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5163 item should appear in the menu.
5164:filter FILTER-FN
5165 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5166 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5167 It should return a binding to use instead.
5168:keys DESCRIPTION
5169 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5170 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5171 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5172:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5173 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5174 keyboard binding.
5175:key-sequence nil
5176 This means that the command normally has no
5177 keyboard equivalent.
5178:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5179:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5180 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5181 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5182 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5183
5184Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5185Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5186
5187(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5188
5189** New event types
5190
5191*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5192mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5193corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5194which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5195
5196 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5197
5198where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5199same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5200indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5201negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5202the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5203forward, away from the user.
5204
5205As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5206
5207*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5208files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5209and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5210filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5211loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5212
5213 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5214
5215where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5216same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5217that were dragged and dropped.
5218
5219As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5220
5221** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5222
5223*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5224any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5225to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5226
5227*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5228can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5229that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5230
5231*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5232in Emacs 19 and before.
5233
5234The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5235The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5236
5237*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5238buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5239unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5240representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5241
5242This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5243as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5244viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5245one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5246will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5247
5248This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5249representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5250(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5251consistent with the new representation.
5252
5253*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5254representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5255about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5256however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5257
5258The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5259nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5260using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5261
5262*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5263representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5264representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5265
5266The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5267loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5268is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5269
5270*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5271which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5272
5273*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5274which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5275
5276*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5277portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5278so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5279You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5280
5281*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5282it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5283
5284*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5285convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5286buffer or string being searched.
5287
5288One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5289[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5290searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5291searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5292obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5293you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5294expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5295
5296*** Structure of coding system changed.
5297
5298All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5299by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5300which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5301as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5302vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5303your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5304define-coding-system-alias.
5305
5306The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5307the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5308access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5309pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5310character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5311safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5312'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5313`iso-8859-1'.
5314
5315Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5316The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5317coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5318(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5319
5320Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5321also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5322are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5323the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5324
5325*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5326proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5327This function requires a user interaction.
5328
5329*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5330find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5331select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5332systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5333a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5334select-safe-coding-system.
5335
5336*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5337decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5338last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5339was done.
5340
5341*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5342used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5343coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5344
5345*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5346return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5347characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5348`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5349
5350*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5351coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5352coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5353converted.
5354
5355*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5356coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5357
5358*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5359character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5360character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5361each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5362either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5363range of characters.
5364
5365*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5366Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5367
5368*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5369in the current buffer at position POS.
5370
5371*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5372input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5373function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5374character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5375event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5376binding input-method-function to nil.
5377
5378The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5379method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5380input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5381the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5382not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5383
5384The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5385subsequent events of a key sequence.
5386
5387*** You can customize any language environment by using
5388set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5389
5390The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5391customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5392instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5393environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5394exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5395\f
5396* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5397
5398** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5399options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5400at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5401tree structure.
5402
5403M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5404user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5405
5406With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5407session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5408in your .emacs file.)
5409
5410** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5411You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5412
5413** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5414This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5415
5416** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5417immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5418kills the region.
5419
5420The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5421delete the character before point, as usual.
5422
5423** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5424on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5425by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5426
5427** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5428insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5429the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5430onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5431history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5432past.)
5433
5434** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5435This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5436in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5437TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5438makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5439
5440As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5441and is an alias for it.
5442
5443If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5444use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5445
5446** Scrolling changes
5447
5448*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5449position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5450
5451In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5452on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5453where it started.
5454
5455*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5456move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5457screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5458does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5459
5460*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5461top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5462comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5463recenters the window.
5464
5465** International character set support (MULE)
5466
5467Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5468including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5469Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5470Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5471features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5472MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5473
5474Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5475coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5476character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5477variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5478into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5479
5480Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5481generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5482supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5483language, to make it possible to type them.
5484
5485The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5486character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5487
5488The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5489to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5490
5491You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5492
5493 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5494
5495Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5496characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5497argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5498already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5499characters for their work until they want to change.
5500
5501*** Input methods
5502
5503An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5504specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5505has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5506the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5507support several input methods.
5508
5509The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5510another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5511work.
5512
5513A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5514characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5515composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5516consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5517sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5518letter.
5519
5520The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5521by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5522First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5523marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5524mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5525
5526None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5527they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5528phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5529converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5530
5531Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5532word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5533typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5534the first guess is wrong.
5535
5536*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5537turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5538
5539If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5540byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5541they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5542the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5543
5544However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5545use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5546includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5547translate automatically to and from either one.
5548
5549*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5550
5551Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5552file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5553sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5554what you want.
5555
5556If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5557example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5558system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5559multibyte characters in that buffer.
5560
5561If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5562character conversion as well.
5563
5564*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5565
5566A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5567Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5568requires using many fonts.
5569
5570Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5571collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5572
5573A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5574the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5575have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5576you would use a font.
5577
5578If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5579specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5580display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5581
5582The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5583(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5584characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5585or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5586and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5587
5588*** Defining fontsets.
5589
5590Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5591chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5592with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5593
5594Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5595of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5596`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5597standard fontset are created automatically.
5598
5599If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5600argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5601FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5602with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5603name is `fontset-startup'.
5604
5605Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5606The resource value should have this form:
5607 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5608FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5609 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5610 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5611 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5612The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5613of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5614CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5615FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5616
5617Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5618last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5619You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5620
5621For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5622font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5623following resource,
5624 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5625the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5626 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5627Here is the substitution rule:
5628 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5629 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5630 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5631 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5632 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5633
5634The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5635fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5636that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5637
5638With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5639like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5640name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5641fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5642fontsets.
5643
5644*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5645defaults for a particular choice of language.
5646
5647Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5648method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5649visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5650already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5651language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5652system for new files that you create.
5653
5654It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5655set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5656whole Emacs session.
5657
5658For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5659chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5660with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5661
5662*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5663specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5664specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5665the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5666coding systems that Emacs supports.
5667
5668*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5669lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5670This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5671After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5672is used for *the immediately following command*.
5673
5674So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5675write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5676
5677If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5678then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5679
5680For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5681visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5682
5683*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5684construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5685to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5686specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5687of the file.
5688
5689*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5690the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5691code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5692translated into that character code.
5693
5694This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5695various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5696
5697By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5698
5699*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5700the coding system for keyboard input.
5701
5702Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5703with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5704some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5705
5706By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5707
5708Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5709input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5710translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5711to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5712designed to work with terminals.
5713
5714*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5715specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5716This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5717has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5718translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5719in the corresponding buffer.
5720
5721By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5722
5723*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5724to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5725It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5726
5727*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5728an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5729command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5730want to use.
5731
5732C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5733method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5734
5735*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5736layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5737remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5738which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5739
5740*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5741the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5742related information.
5743
5744*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5745HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5746scripts.
5747
5748*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5749information about the support for a particular language.
5750You specify the language as an argument.
5751
5752*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5753the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5754first dash.
5755
5756A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5757(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5758whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
57591 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5760
5761 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5762 B big5 (Chinese)
5763 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5764 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5765 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5766 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5767 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5768 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5769 K euc-korea (Korean)
5770 R koi8 (Russian)
5771 Q tibetan
5772 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5773 T lao
5774 T tis620 (Thai)
5775 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5776 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5777 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5778 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5779 z hz (Chinese)
5780
5781When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5782two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5783coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5784keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5785
5786*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5787conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5788
5789When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5790into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5791rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5792Rmail files themselves.
5793
5794*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5795conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5796
5797Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5798for sending mail:
5799
5800- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5801- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5802- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5803 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5804- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5805
5806*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5807to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5808Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5809translations.
5810
5811** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5812of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5813insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5814without any conversion.
5815
5816** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5817You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5818RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5819any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5820
5821** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5822functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5823
5824Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5825Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5826
5827Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5828mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5829
5830** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5831complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5832in the buffer before point.
5833
5834With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5835symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5836you are using.
5837
5838With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5839just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5840
5841** File locking works with NFS now.
5842
5843The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5844in the same directory as FILENAME.
5845
5846This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5847works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5848can become a bottleneck.
5849
5850The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5851does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5852create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5853file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5854rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5855so useful that the change is worth while.
5856
5857When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5858are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5859collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5860tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5861
5862** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5863it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5864show-paren-mode.
5865
5866** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5867selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5868delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5869
5870** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5871within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5872complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5873
5874** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5875it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5876set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5877
5878** Changes in View mode.
5879
5880*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5881Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5882
5883*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5884view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5885
5886*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5887previous state.
5888
5889*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5890scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5891
5892*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5893non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5894not just the selected window.
5895
5896*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5897read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5898turns View mode on or off.
5899
5900*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5901how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5902delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5903
5904** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5905now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5906
5907** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5908has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5909presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5910which version to compare with.
5911
5912** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
5913blocks if a match is inside the block.
5914
5915The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5916is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5917isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5918shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5919
5920By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5921of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5922blocks, all of them or none.
5923
5924** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5925current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5926confirmation first.
5927
5928** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5929now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5930However, the mode will not be changed if
5931(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5932(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5933 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5934(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5935
5936This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5937
5938However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5939these commands do not change the major mode.
5940
5941** M-x occur changes.
5942
5943*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5944it performs a case-sensitive search.
5945
5946*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5947if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5948using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5949
5950** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5951in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5952window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5953that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5954buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5955
5956** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5957after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5958appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5959come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5960
5961** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5962selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5963buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5964
5965** Outline mode changes.
5966
5967*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5968
5969*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5970
5971** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5972you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5973Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5974was already active.
5975
5976The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5977unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5978get confused by it.
5979
5980If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5981set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5982
5983** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5984
5985*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5986conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5987character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5988including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5989
5990The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5991mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5992copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5993
5994*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5995are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5996values.
5997
5998`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5999case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6000`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6001case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6002
6003** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6004certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6005can be. The default value is 30.
6006
6007** Changes in Mail mode.
6008
6009*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6010Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6011composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6012`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6013`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6014behavior.
6015
6016C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6017compose-mail-other-frame.
6018
6019*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6020the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6021replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6022buffer that shows the original message.
6023
6024*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6025with separator lines around the contents.
6026
6027*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6028in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6029definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6030need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6031
6032*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6033
6034**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6035for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6036controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6037Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6038
6039**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6040to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6041/etc/passwd.
6042
6043**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6044to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6045/etc/passwd.
6046
6047** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6048special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6049directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6050reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6051
6052Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6053when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6054be taken to be magic.
6055
6056** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6057files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6058available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6059
6060M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6061(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6062
6063** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6064suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6065
6066In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6067
6068new key dired.el binding old key
6069------- ---------------- -------
6070 * c dired-change-marks c
6071 * m dired-mark m
6072 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6073 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6074 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6075 * u dired-unmark u
6076 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6077 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6078 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6079 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6080 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6081 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6082
6083** Rmail changes.
6084
6085*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6086saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6087chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6088each time you run it.
6089
6090*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6091whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6092
6093*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6094messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6095means to move in the opposite direction.
6096
6097*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6098you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6099
6100*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6101just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6102It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6103can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6104for output.
6105
6106** Gnus changes.
6107
6108*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6109
6110*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6111Gnus.
6112
6113*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6114`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6115
6116*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6117article mode line.
6118
6119*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6120
6121*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6122
6123(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6124
6125*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6126are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6127`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6128
6129*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6130
6131*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6132
6133*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6134See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6135
6136*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6137Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6138used to pick articles.
6139
6140*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6141another have been added.
6142
6143 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6144
6145*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6146generating lines in buffers.
6147
6148*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6149`M-C-_'.
6150
6151*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6152
6153*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6154
6155 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6156
6157*** Scores can be decayed.
6158
6159 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6160
6161*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6162Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6163
6164*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6165the native server.
6166
6167 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6168
6169*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6170(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6171
6172*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6173
6174*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6175even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6176
6177*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6178(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6179
6180 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6181 a group.
6182
6183*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6184sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6185
6186 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6187
6188*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6189
6190 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6191
6192*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6193
6194 Use the `Y c' command.
6195
6196*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6197
6198*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6199
6200 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6201
6202*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6203from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6204
6205 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6206
6207*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6208
6209*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6210the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6211
6212 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6213
6214Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6215and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6216from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6217hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6218this issue.)
6219
6220Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6221automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6222particular news group. This can be done by:
6223
6224 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6225
6226Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6227of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6228"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6229system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6230for reading and posting).
6231
6232CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6233 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6234Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6235newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6236there.
6237
6238Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6239default. Here are some of these default settings:
6240
6241 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6242 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6243 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6244 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6245 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6246
6247When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6248the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6249
6250** CC mode changes.
6251
6252*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6253code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6254values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6255this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6256Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6257loaded.
6258
6259If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6260Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6261style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6262share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6263c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6264must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6265
6266*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6267of the current buffer.
6268
6269*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6270it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6271of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6272
6273*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6274style that the Python developers like.
6275
6276*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6277This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6278just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6279
6280** VC Changes [new]
6281
6282** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6283name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6284directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6285
6286This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6287master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6288developers.
6289
6290You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6291RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6292
6293*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6294other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6295writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6296calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6297
6298*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6299version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6300
6301** Calendar changes.
6302
6303A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6304of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6305for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6306
6307** ps-print changes
6308
6309There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6310
6311*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6312
6313The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6314formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6315`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6316`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6317It defaults to `letter'.
6318If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6319
6320The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6321of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6322non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6323
6324The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6325It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6326It defaults to 1.
6327
6328*** Horizontal layout
6329
6330The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6331`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6332All are measured in points.
6333
6334*** Vertical layout
6335
6336The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6337`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6338All are measured in points.
6339
6340*** Headers
6341
6342If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6343`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6344margin above the text.
6345
6346If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6347framing box is printed around the header.
6348
6349The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6350`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6351
6352The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6353`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6354`ps-header-font-size'.
6355
6356*** Font managing
6357
6358The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6359used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6360`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6361elements to this alist.
6362
6363The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6364for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6365
6366** hideshow changes.
6367
6368*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6369C++, ; for lisp).
6370
6371*** Support for java-mode added.
6372
6373*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6374in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6375
6376*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6377the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6378way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6379
6380*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6381robust and a lot faster.
6382
6383*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6384
6385*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6386to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6387documentation for more details.
6388
6389** Changes in Enriched mode.
6390
6391*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6392filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6393of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6394use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6395the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6396
6397*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6398distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6399as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6400as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6401
6402** Font Lock mode
6403
6404*** Custom support
6405
6406The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6407font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6408faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6409group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6410your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6411consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6412
6413You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6414
6415*** Maximum decoration
6416
6417Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6418default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6419of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6420supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6421to get the old behavior.
6422
6423*** New support
6424
6425Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6426
6427Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6428support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6429
6430*** Configurable support
6431
6432Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6433additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6434c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6435java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6436list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6437of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6438convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6439
6440Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6441way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6442it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6443
6444*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6445
6446You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6447highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6448for any mode.
6449
6450For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6451
6452 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6453
6454in your ~/.emacs.
6455
6456*** New faces
6457
6458Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6459font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6460distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6461to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6462
6463*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6464
6465The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6466cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6467same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6468
6469*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6470
6471The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6472according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6473the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6474non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6475refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6476the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6477Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6478
6479This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6480For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6481this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6482refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6483containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6484the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6485
6486As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6487
6488Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6489Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6490Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6491new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6492
6493If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6494settings.
6495
6496** Ada mode changes.
6497
6498*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6499If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6500procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6501you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6502stubs.
6503
6504*** There are two new commands:
6505 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6506 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6507
6508The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6509`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6510`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6511
6512*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6513is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6514Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6515
6516*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6517formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6518places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6519space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6520
6521** Scheme mode changes.
6522
6523*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6524mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6525for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6526with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6527have any effect.
6528
6529If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6530still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6531scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6532variables as buffer-local variables.
6533
6534*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6535Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6536
6537** Changes to the emacsclient program
6538
6539*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6540USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6541associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6542can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6543
6544*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6545it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6546buffer in Emacs.
6547
6548*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6549use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6550ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6551option takes precedence.
6552
6553** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6554constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6555(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6556
6557** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6558which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6559the current defun.
6560
6561** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6562following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6563
6564** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6565and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6566necessary).
6567
6568** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6569if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6570these register values no longer become completely useless.
6571If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6572asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6573it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6574
6575** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6576example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6577be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6578you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6579
6580You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6581variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6582file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6583revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6584only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6585
6586** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6587since it applies only to the current frame.
6588
6589** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6590file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6591and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6592
6593This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6594multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6595variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6596tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6597instead of just the file you are editing.
6598
6599** RefTeX mode
6600
6601RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6602and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6603different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6604multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6605turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6606
6607C-c ( reftex-label
6608 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6609 knows which kind of label is needed.
6610
6611C-c ) reftex-reference
6612 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6613 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6614
6615C-c [ reftex-citation
6616 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6617 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6618
6619C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6620 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6621
6622C-c = reftex-toc
6623 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6624 can quickly jump to every section.
6625
6626Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6627commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6628Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6629reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6630C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6631
6632** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6633
6634*** Info documentation is now available.
6635
6636*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6637both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6638
6639*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6640bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6641
6642*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6643(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6644
6645*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6646entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6647appropriate functions.
6648
6649*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6650entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6651
6652*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6653been cleaned.
6654
6655*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6656bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6657
6658*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6659shall be delimited.
6660
6661*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6662bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6663bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6664
6665*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6666field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6667prefixed with `ALT'.
6668
6669*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6670bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6671formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6672documentation).
6673
6674*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6675documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6676for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6677
6678*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6679comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6680
6681*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6682alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6683signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6684
6685*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6686
6687*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6688
6689*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6690from alien sources.
6691
6692*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6693to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6694crossref entries.
6695
6696*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6697region.
6698
6699*** Added support for imenu.
6700
6701*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6702of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6703`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6704`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6705
6706*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6707from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6708
6709** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6710
6711** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6712
6713** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6714functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6715Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6716as an argument.
6717
6718When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6719and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6720
6721** browse-url changes
6722
6723*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6724Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6725(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6726non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6727customization variables.
6728
6729*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6730
6731*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6732lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6733(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6734
6735** Changes in Ediff
6736
6737*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6738pops up the Info file for this command.
6739
6740*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6741the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6742merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6743directories).
6744
6745*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6746and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6747files in the same directory.
6748
6749*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6750The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6751related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6752
6753** Changes in Viper
6754
6755*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
6756*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
6757 instead of vip-.
6758*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
6759*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
6760Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6761*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6762*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6763*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6764color when Viper is in insert state.
6765*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6766Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6767viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6768
6769** Etags changes.
6770
6771*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6772default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6773Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6774variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6775not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6776
6777*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6778
6779*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6780constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6781
6782*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6783recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6784In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6785
6786*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6787C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6788recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6789methods and protocols.
6790
6791*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6792.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6793column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6794paragraph name.
6795
6796*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6797an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6798at least M times and as many as N times.
6799
6800** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6801in files has changed slightly.
6802
6803With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6804time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6805This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6806with old time-stamp-format values.
6807
6808In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6809(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6810This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6811reasons.
6812
6813In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6814natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6815fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6816(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6817time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6818specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6819
6820Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6821case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6822truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6823
6824The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6825being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6826future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6827recommended now will continue to work then.
6828
6829See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6830details.
6831
6832** There are some additional major modes:
6833
6834dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6835m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6836meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6837
6838** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6839copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6840into Emacs.
6841
6842** New Lisp packages include:
6843
6844*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6845
6846*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6847be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6848
6849*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6850
6851*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6852in shell buffers.
6853
6854*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6855See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6856and `elint-defun'.
6857
6858*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6859meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6860ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6861strings or comments.
6862
6863These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6864abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6865you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6866insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6867at these points.
6868
6869*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6870can visit them by short forms of their names.
6871
6872*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6873Emacs Lisp function at point.
6874
6875*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6876
6877*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6878switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6879
6880*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6881
6882*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6883
6884*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6885
6886*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6887from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6888
6889*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6890You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6891inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6892original place after inserting the copy.
6893
6894*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6895on the buffer.
6896
6897You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6898velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6899(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6900
6901Enable mouse-drag with:
6902 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6903-or-
6904 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6905
6906*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6907mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6908
6909*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6910It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6911
6912*** ogonek
6913
6914The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6915Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6916platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6917TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6918ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6919prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6920instance) and vice versa.
6921
6922To use this package load it using
6923 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6924Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
6925 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
6926 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6927The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6928ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6929
6930*** Interface to ph.
6931
6932Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6933
6934The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6935services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6936these servers.
6937
6938*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6939
6940*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6941You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6942while the real cursor does not move.
6943
6944*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6945for visiting your favorite web sites.
6946
6947*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6948so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6949
6950** movemail change
6951
6952Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6953mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6954supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6955user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6956
6957This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6958\f
6959* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6960
6961** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6962
6963Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6964end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6965Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6966file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6967file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6968
6969To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6970C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6971coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6972specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6973LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6974save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6975\f
6976* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6977
6978** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6979Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6980vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6981Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6982
6983** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6984to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6985
6986In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6987don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6988"win".
6989
6990** Basic Lisp changes
6991
6992*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6993evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6994
6995*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6996be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6997or by the user.
6998
6999The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7000
7001*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7002
7003(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7004(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7005
7006*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7007usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7008its argument.
7009
7010*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7011
7012*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7013
7014*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7015
7016*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7017error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7018include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7019`format' function.
7020
7021*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7022or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7023whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7024
7025*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7026either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7027adding one of these suffixes.
7028
7029*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7030which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7031If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7032
7033We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7034because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7035
7036*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7037
7038*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7039You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7040
7041*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7042conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7043
7044 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7045
7046BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7047BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7048
7049*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7050choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7051restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7052works using `save-current-buffer'.
7053
7054*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7055write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7056of the last form.
7057
7058*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7059which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7060last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7061as the last form.
7062
7063*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7064characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7065matches.
7066
7067For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7068
7069*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7070with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7071Then it returns that string.
7072
7073For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7074
7075(with-output-to-string
7076 (princ "The buffer is ")
7077 (princ (buffer-name)))
7078
7079returns "The buffer is foo".
7080
7081** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7082is non-nil.
7083
7084These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7085buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7086characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7087
7088*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7089a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7090
7091Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7092character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7093Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7094position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7095characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7096 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7097
7098ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7099Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7100non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7101characters".
7102
7103The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7104through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7105"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7106range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7107leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7108
7109*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7110(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7111multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7112character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7113
7114This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7115always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7116
7117However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7118
7119*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7120because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7121have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7122the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7123guaranteed.
7124
7125*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7126between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7127character).
7128
7129When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7130
7131 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7132 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7133 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7134 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7135 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7136
7137*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7138
7139*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7140`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7141more than the number of characters.
7142
7143You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7144it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7145\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7146is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7147follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7148newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7149
7150*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7151and returns a string containing those characters.
7152
7153*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7154(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7155counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7156character, sref signals an error.
7157
7158*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7159in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7160string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7161
7162*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7163in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7164region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7165
7166*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7167the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7168to a vector of the characters in it.
7169
7170*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7171of a string. You call it as follows:
7172
7173 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7174
7175This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7176STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7177This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7178Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7179it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7180
7181*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7182if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7183
7184*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7185if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7186
7187*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7188to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7189not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7190which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7191
7192(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7193
7194This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7195
7196The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7197If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7198are not included in the resulting value.
7199
7200The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7201at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7202WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7203is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7204
7205If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7206place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7207character extends across that column), then the padding character
7208PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7209string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7210column START-COLUMN.
7211
7212*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7213the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7214necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7215difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7216changed text, before the change.
7217
7218*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7219sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7220one character set for each script, not for each language.
7221
7222**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7223
7224**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7225
7226**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7227set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7228
7229**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7230name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7231which identify the character within that character set.
7232
7233**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7234byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7235opposite of split-char.
7236
7237**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7238of all the characters between BEG and END.
7239
7240**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7241of all the characters in a string.
7242
7243*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7244and specifying coding systems.
7245
7246**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7247system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7248of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7249(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7250and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7251as what to do about code conversion.)
7252
7253**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7254name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7255
7256**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7257for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7258except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7259
7260Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7261which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7262to match against a file name.
7263
7264VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7265a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7266decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7267to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7268systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7269specifies the coding system for encoding.
7270
7271If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7272or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7273
7274**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7275the coding system to use for network sockets.
7276
7277Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7278which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7279either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7280service names.
7281
7282VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7283a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7284decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7285to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7286systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7287specifies the coding system for encoding.
7288
7289If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7290or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7291
7292**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7293for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7294except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7295start the subprocess.
7296
7297**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7298systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7299when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7300(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7301to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7302
7303**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7304coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7305subprocess.
7306
7307It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7308but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7309start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7310connection permanently or until overridden.
7311
7312The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7313file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7314network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7315coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7316It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7317system for one operation at a time.
7318
7319**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7320files, subprocesses or network connections.
7321
7322**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7323coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7324The value is a cons cell,
7325 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7326where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7327the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7328input to the subprocess.
7329
7330**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7331change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7332
7333** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7334customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7335you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7336
7337You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7338variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7339information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7340legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7341customization.
7342
7343Thus, instead of writing
7344
7345 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7346 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7347
7348you would now write this:
7349
7350 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7351 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7352 :type 'boolean
7353 :group foo)
7354
7355The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7356two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7357describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7358for a description of them.
7359
7360The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7361should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7362
7363 (defgroup ispell nil
7364 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7365 :group 'processes)
7366
7367The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7368group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7369but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7370to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7371second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7372
7373Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7374package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7375have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7376package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7377first-level subgroups.
7378
7379** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7380
7381This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7382separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7383
7384** easy-mmode
7385
7386The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7387developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7388only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7389predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7390`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7391`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7392
7393** Text property changes
7394
7395*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7396text property.
7397
7398*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7399previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7400place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7401functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7402starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7403
7404If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7405LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7406of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7407position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7408
7409*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7410value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7411is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7412
7413** Changes in invisibility features
7414
7415*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7416hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7417is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7418should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7419would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7420make the overlay visible.
7421
7422During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7423invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7424needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7425which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7426the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7427t when it should hide it.
7428
7429*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7430
7431Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7432invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7433and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7434Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7435manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7436Here is an example of how to do this:
7437
7438 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7439 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7440 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7441 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7442
7443 ...
7444 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7445
7446 ...
7447 ;; When done with the overlays:
7448 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7449 ;; Or respectively:
7450 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7451
7452** Changes in syntax parsing.
7453
7454*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7455`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7456obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7457`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7458
7459If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7460is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7461used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7462
7463When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7464character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7465
7466 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7467 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7468
7469 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7470 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7471 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7472
7473 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7474 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7475 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7476 determine the syntax type of the character.
7477
7478 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7479 of the current buffer.
7480
7481*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7482value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7483for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7484
7485*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7486and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7487only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7488character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7489another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7490
7491These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7492text property.
7493
7494*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7495arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7496of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7497
7498*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7499(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7500element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7501nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7502string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7503
7504*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7505syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7506`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7507
7508** Changes in face features
7509
7510*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7511if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7512
7513*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7514of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7515
7516*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7517set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7518
7519*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7520set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7521
7522*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7523by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7524and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7525the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7526overlay property).
7527
7528This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7529arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7530
7531** Changes in file-handling functions
7532
7533*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7534directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7535they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7536is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7537
7538This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7539begins with ~.
7540
7541*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7542it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7543
7544*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7545the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7546
7547*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7548as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7549
7550*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7551character code conversion as well as other things.
7552
7553Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7554(formerly it did not).
7555
7556*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7557environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7558
7559*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7560instead of constant strings.
7561
7562*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7563to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7564any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7565
7566substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7567in the same way as before.
7568
7569*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7570The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7571which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7572
7573*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7574error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7575else, and returns nil.
7576
7577*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7578directory cannot be listed.
7579
7580** Changes in minibuffer input
7581
7582*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7583read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7584additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7585argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7586ways:
7587
7588 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7589 It is available through the history command M-n.
7590
7591*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7592read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7593argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7594minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7595enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7596
7597In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7598argument in this way.
7599
7600*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7601from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7602minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7603
7604** Echo area features
7605
7606*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7607echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7608minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7609after the echo area is cleared.
7610
7611*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7612in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7613
7614** Keyboard input features
7615
7616*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7617set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7618
7619*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7620received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7621by keyboard macros.
7622
7623** Frame-related changes
7624
7625*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7626creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7627hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7628
7629*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7630the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7631has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7632
7633*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7634selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7635value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7636in the selected frame.
7637
7638*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7639is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7640which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7641
7642** X Windows features
7643
7644*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7645x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7646x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7647
7648*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7649The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7650
7651*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7652MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7653A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7654
7655If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7656it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7657
7658** Subprocess features
7659
7660*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7661functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7662automatically.
7663
7664*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7665and returns the output from the command as a string.
7666
7667*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7668and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7669
7670** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7671does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7672
7673** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7674at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7675goes after the other menu items.
7676
7677** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7678of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7679around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7680are in use.
7681
7682The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7683series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7684
7685Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7686after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7687form.
7688
7689** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7690is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7691but its hook is still run.
7692
7693** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7694for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7695
7696If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7697regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7698useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7699
7700This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7701are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7702filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7703warned.
7704
7705** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7706way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7707
7708** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7709integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7710functions like display-time.
7711
7712** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7713name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7714
7715** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7716can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7717is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7718
7719** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7720if there is an error in compilation.
7721
7722** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7723switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7724argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7725they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7726
7727** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7728Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7729the *scratch* buffer.
7730
7731** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7732The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7733where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7734e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7735
7736** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7737and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7738It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7739
7740** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7741using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7742variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7743and compose-mail-other-frame.
7744
7745** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7746can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7747full name of the specified user will be returned.
7748
7749** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7750of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7751where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7752in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7753option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7754files at all.
7755
7756** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7757and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7758width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7759the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7760
7761For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7762minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7763with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7764is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7765
7766** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7767
7768** imenu.el changes.
7769
7770You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
7771item from menu created by imenu.
7772
7773An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7774#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7775select one of those items.
7776\f
7777* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7778\f
7779* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7780
7781** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7782mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7783
7784** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7785use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7786Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7787\f
7788* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7789
7790** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7791To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7792
7793** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7794conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7795matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7796expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7797word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7798all caps.
7799
7800** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7801at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7802
7803When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7804does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7805as in previous Emacs versions.
7806
7807** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7808non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7809time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7810frames.
7811
7812** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7813if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7814This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7815Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7816accident.
7817
7818** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7819keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7820It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7821line and then executing the macro.
7822
7823This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7824
7825** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7826(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7827characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7828characters.
7829
7830** Font Lock mode
7831
7832*** Font Lock support modes
7833
7834Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7835below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7836hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7837to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7838Font Lock mode is enabled.
7839
7840For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7841
7842 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7843
7844in your ~/.emacs.
7845
7846*** lazy-lock
7847
7848The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7849only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7850becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7851Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7852occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7853buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7854Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7855
7856To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7857
7858 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7859
7860To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7861
7862** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7863
7864*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7865paren and key.
7866
7867*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7868supported.
7869
7870** Gnus changes.
7871
7872Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7873commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7874significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7875previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7876
7877Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7878between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7879
7880*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
7881variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7882obsolete.
7883
7884*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7885missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7886
7887 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7888
7889*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7890
7891 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7892
7893*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
7894referred.
7895
7896*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7897
7898 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7899
7900*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7901
7902 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7903
7904*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
7905buffers.
7906
7907 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7908
7909*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7910
7911 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7912
7913*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7914
7915 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7916
7917*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7918
7919 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7920
7921*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7922is possible.
7923
7924 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7925
7926*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7927groups of groups.
7928
7929*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7930
7931*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
7932batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
7933
7934*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7935
7936*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7937
7938*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7939
7940 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7941
7942*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7943expiration times.
7944
7945*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7946
7947*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7948process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7949
7950*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7951articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7952bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7953
7954*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7955articles with the `*' command.
7956
7957*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7958
7959*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7960
7961 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7962
7963*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7964
7965*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
7966`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7967
7968*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
7969buffer.
7970
7971*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7972
7973*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7974
7975*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7976
7977 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7978
7979*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
7980
7981 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7982
7983*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
7984
7985*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7986
7987*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
7988
7989 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
7990 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7991
7992*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
7993refetching.
7994
7995 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7996
7997*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7998buffer to allow easier treatment.
7999
8000*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8001
8002*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8003
8004 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8005
8006*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8007articles.
8008
8009 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8010
8011*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8012
8013*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8014cited text to hide is now customizable.
8015
8016 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8017
8018*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8019
8020 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8021
8022*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8023
8024*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8025
8026The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8027in greater detail.
8028\f
8029* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8030
8031** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8032second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8033asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8034exists.
8035
8036** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8037as well as lists.
8038
8039** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8040of a given keymap.
8041
8042** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8043given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8044keymap or nil.
8045
8046** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8047an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8048name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8049menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8050equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8051alias.
8052\f
8053* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8054
8055** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8056
8057Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8058This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8059was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8060far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8061pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8062
8063For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8064you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8065`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8066
8067** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8068
8069The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8070do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8071It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8072much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8073chapter of the manual for details.
8074
8075However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8076customization variables take effect.
8077
8078** Marking with the mouse.
8079
8080When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8081highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8082using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8083
8084** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8085
8086*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8087
8088*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8089to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8090
8091*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8092in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8093you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8094application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8095applications, these problems are significant.
8096
8097If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8098likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8099However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8100will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8101other DOS application as a subprocess.
8102
8103Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8104You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8105
8106If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8107subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8108have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8109Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8110separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8111Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8112
8113** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8114
8115This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8116which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8117minibuffer contains.
8118
8119** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8120
8121The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8122It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8123It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8124affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8125
8126The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8127it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8128and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8129when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8130
8131** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8132enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8133
8134** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8135F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8136Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8137
8138If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8139menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8140something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8141the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8142
8143 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8144
8145** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8146to replace the characters it "deletes".
8147
8148** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8149
8150** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8151a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8152select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8153It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8154immediately after the selected one.
8155
8156This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8157made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8158
8159** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8160
8161Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8162directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8163If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8164Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8165recover-session.
8166
8167You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8168auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8169will not work.
8170
8171Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8172normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8173this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8174bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8175now that the bug is fixed.
8176
8177** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8178
8179There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8180when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8181Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8182which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8183
8184If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8185telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8186VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8187the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8188
8189** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8190Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8191is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8192
8193There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8194Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8195enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8196The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8197remain normal.
8198
8199** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8200header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8201
8202Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8203known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8204offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8205Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8206
8207Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8208of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8209a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8210name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8211documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8212`mail-directory-stream'.)
8213
8214** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8215skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8216characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8217with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8218
8219Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8220- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8221wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8222
8223The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8224less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8225headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8226Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8227Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8228fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8229to a limitation in font-lock).
8230
8231External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8232
8233** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8234buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8235buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8236this example:
8237
8238 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8239 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8240
8241** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8242
8243*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8244
8245*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8246
8247*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8248
8249*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8250entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8251will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8252isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8253(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8254The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8255
8256*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8257does the same job.
8258
8259*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8260"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8261
8262*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8263text.
8264
8265** Font Lock mode
8266
8267*** Global Font Lock mode
8268
8269Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8270new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8271font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8272turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8273on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8274
8275For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8276
8277 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8278
8279in your ~/.emacs.
8280
8281*** Local Refontification
8282
8283In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8284However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8285those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8286command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8287
8288In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8289(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8290current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8291above and below point.
8292
8293With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8294
8295** Follow mode
8296
8297Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8298buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8299side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8300they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8301split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8302follow-mode.
8303
8304M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8305
8306To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8307command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8308
8309** hide-show changes.
8310
8311The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8312to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8313normal hooks.
8314
8315** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8316The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8317
8318** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8319recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8320those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8321
8322** MSDOS Changes
8323
8324*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8325Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8326
8327*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8328and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8329
8330*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8331
8332*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8333pressing both mouse buttons.
8334
8335*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8336restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8337are:
8338
8339**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8340now works.
8341
8342**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8343
8344**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8345implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8346
8347**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8348
8349**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8350
8351**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8352
8353**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8354
8355**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8356\f
8357* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8358
8359** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8360tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8361remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8362this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8363behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8364
8365** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8366
8367The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8368not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8369need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8370be different.
8371
8372It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8373than `system-type'.
8374
8375See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8376
8377** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8378now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8379
8380** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8381that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8382
8383** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8384no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8385reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8386
8387The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8388to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8389like this:
8390
8391 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8392
8393SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8394It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8395becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8396
8397REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8398seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8399means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8400
8401*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8402up if too much time passes.
8403
8404 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8405
8406This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8407If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8408of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8409form in BODY.
8410
8411*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8412a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8413call looks like this:
8414
8415 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8416
8417SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8418runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8419timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8420ARGS.
8421
8422Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8423command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8424command.
8425
8426REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8427time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8428does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8429each time Emacs becomes idle.
8430
8431If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8432idle for SECS seconds.
8433
8434*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8435all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8436programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8437instead.
8438
8439*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8440there is no answer within a certain time.
8441
8442 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8443
8444asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8445within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8446Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8447
8448** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8449arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8450meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8451arguments in between are ignored.
8452
8453This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8454the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8455
8456** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8457/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8458/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8459site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8460version.
8461
8462It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8463version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8464for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8465has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8466and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8467problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8468
8469** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8470.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8471systems with limited file name syntax.
8472
8473Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8474convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8475for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8476completions.el:
8477
8478(defvar save-completions-file-name
8479 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8480 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8481
8482This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8483depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8484convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8485Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8486MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8487
8488** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8489rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8490minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8491
8492** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8493marker from its buffer position.
8494
8495** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8496Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8497The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8498
8499** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8500that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8501condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8502of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8503matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8504regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8505
8506This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8507errors that happen often during editing.
8508
8509** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8510into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8511puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8512
8513** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8514now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8515
8516** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8517a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8518name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8519to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8520and not get-buffer-window.
8521
8522** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8523calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8524being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8525
8526If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8527buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8528property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8529non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8530are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8531property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8532over and over for the same text.
8533
8534** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8535
8536*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8537in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8538
8539;; @(#) HEADER: text
8540;; $HEADER: text $
8541
8542in addition to the normal
8543
8544;; HEADER: text
8545
8546*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8547checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8548lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8549
8550
a933dad1 8551\f
3787e12e 8552* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8553
8554----------------------------------------------------------------------
8555Copyright information:
8556
424d8b44 8557Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8558
8559 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8560 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8561 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8562 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8563
8564 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8565 of this document, or of portions of it,
8566 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8567 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8568\f
8569Local variables:
8570mode: outline
8571paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8572end: